Home
        Model 42i-HL - User Manual
         Contents
1.                                                                            1 3    Chapter 2  Installation                                                                                        2 1  Lifting                                                                                     2 1  Unpacking and Inspection                                                       2 1  Setup Procedure                                                                      2 2  Startup                                                                                    2 5    Chapter 3  Operation                                                                                          3 1  Display                                                                                    3 2  Pushbuttons                                                                            3 3  Soft Keys                                                                              3 4  Software Overview                                                                   3 4  Power Up Screen                                                                  3 6  Run Screen                                                                           3 6  Main Menu                                                                          3 7  Range Menu                                                                            3 8  Single Range Mode                                                               3 8  Dual Rang
2.                                                                            8 1  NO2 to NO Converter                                                           8 2  Mode Solenoid                                                                     8 2  Reaction Chamber                                                                8 2  Optical Filter                                                                        8 3  Pressure Transducer                                                              8 3  Ozonator                                                                                 8 3  Ozonator Flow Switch                                                          8 3  Photomultiplier Tube                                                              8 3  Photomultiplier Tube Cooler                                                  8 3  External Pump                                                                         8 3  Sample Capillary                                                                  8 3  Dry Air Capillary                                                                  8 4  Software                                                                                  8 4  Instrument Control                                                              8 4  Monitoring Signals                                                               8 4  Measurement Calculations                                                   8 5  Output Communication          
3.                                                      3 30  Auto Manual Mode                                                            3 30  Datalogging Settings                                                           3 31  Communication Settings                                                    3 41  I O Configuration                                                              3 49  Temperature Compensation                                               3 61  Pressure Compensation                                                      3 62  Screen Contrast                                                                  3 63  Service Mode                                                                      3 63  Date Time                                                                          3 64  Diagnostics Menu                                                                 3 64  Program Version                                                                 3 65  Voltages                                                                              3 65  Temperatures                                                                     3 67  Pressure                                                                              3 67  Flow                                                                                   3 67  Analog Input Readings                                                       3 68  Analog Input Voltages                                               
4.                                                    3 100  Unlock Instrument                                                           3 100    Chapter 4  Calibration                                                                                        4 1  Equipment Required                                                               4 1  Pre Calibration                                                                        4 1  Calibration                                                                              4 2  Connecting the GPT Apparatus                                           4 3  Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas Phase Titrator    4 4  Adjusting Instrument Gain                                                   4 6  Preparing NO  NOx  and NO2 Calibration Curves              4 9  Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode                4 11  Calibrate Low NO                                                              4 13  Calibrate Low NOx                                                            4 13  Calibrate Low NO2                                                            4 14  Calibrate High NO                                                            4 14  Calibrate High NOx                                                           4 15  Calibrate High NO2                                                           4 15  Zero and Span Check                                                            4 16    Chapter 5  Preventive Maintenanc
5.                                                  7 3  Firmware Updates                                                                   7 4  Replacement Parts List                                                            7 4  Cable List                                                                                7 6  Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering  the Partition Panel                                                                   7 8  Pump Replacement                                                                 7 9  Fan Replacement                                                                   7 10  PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber  Assembly Replacement                                                          7 11  Photomultiplier Tube Replacement                                       7 13  PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement                    7 15  PMT Voltage Adjustment                                                     7 17  Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal                               7 18  NO2 to NO Converter Replacement                                    7 20  Solenoid Valve Replacement                                                  7 22  Ozonator Assembly Replacement                                          7 23  Ozonator Transformer Replacement                                     7 25  Input Board Replacement                                                      7 25  Input Board Calibration                                      
6.                                             8 5  Electronics                                                                               8 6  Motherboard                                                                        8 6  Measurement Interface Board                                               8 7  Pressure Sensor Assembly                                                     8 7  Temperature Control Board                                                 8 7  PMT Power Supply Assembly                                              8 8  Input Board Assembly                                                          8 8  Digital Output Board                                                           8 8  I O Expansion Board  Optional                                           8 8  Front Panel Connector Board                                               8 9  I O Components                                                                     8 9  Analog Voltage Outputs                                                       8 9  Analog Current Outputs  Optional                                    8 10  Analog Voltage Inputs  Optional                                       8 10  Digital Relay Outputs                                                        8 10  Digital Inputs                                                                     8 10  Serial Ports                                                                         8 11  RS 232 Connection                             
7.                                          B 1  Instrument Identification Number                                          B 2  Commands                                                                              B 2  Measurements                                                                         B 9  Alarms                                                                                   B 12  Diagnostics                                                                            B 16  Datalogging                                                                           B 17  Calibration                                                                            B 24  Keys Display                                                                         B 27  Measurement Configuration                                                  B 29  Hardware Configuration                                                       B 32  Communications Configuration                                            B 36  I O Configuration                                                                 B 40  Record Layout Definition                                                      B 44    Appendix C MODBUS Protocol                                                                          C 1  Serial Communication Parameters                                          C 2  TCP Communication Parameters                                           C 2  Application Data Unit Definition                       
8.                                3 82  PMT Voltage Adjustment                                                  3 83  Range Mode Select                                                             3 83  Converter Set Temperature                                                3 84  Pressure Calibration                                                            3 84  Flow Calibration                                                                3 87  Input Board Calibration                                                     3 89  Temperature Calibration                                                    3 91  Analog Output Calibration                                                 3 92  Analog Input Calibration                                                    3 94  Ozonator Safety                                                                  3 95  Dilution Ratio                                                                    3 96  Display Pixel Test                                                               3 96  Restore User Defaults                                                         3 97  Password                                                                                3 98  Set Password                                                                       3 98  Lock Instrument                                                                 3 99  Change Password                                                                3 99  Remove Password          
9.                                8 11  RS 485 Connection                                                            8 12  Ethernet Connection                                                          8 12  External Accessory Connector                                            8 12    Contents    x  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Chapter 9  Optional Equipment                                                                         9 1  Internal Zero Span Assembly                                                   9 1  Bypass Flow                                                                             9 3  Permeation Dryer Assembly                                                    9 3  Ammonia Scrubber                                                                  9 3  Teflon Particulate Filter                                                           9 4  Ozone Particulate Filter                                                           9 4  NO2 to NO Converter                                                           9 4  I O Expansion Board Assembly                                               9 4  Terminal Block and Cable Kits                                                9 4  Mounting Options                                                                  9 5    Appendix A Warranty                                                                                           A 1    Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands                  
10.                       3 11  Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode                                         3 13  Operating Ranges                                                                                     3 15  Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Table                                                  3 55  Signal Type Group Choices                                                                     3 56  Troubleshooting   General Guide                                                              6 2  Troubleshooting   Alarm Messages                                                             6 3  Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions                                                 6 8  Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions                      6 13  Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram                                             6 16  I O Expansion Board  Optional  Connector Pin Descriptions                 6 18  Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions                                  6 19  Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions                                                 6 20  Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions                        6 21  Model 42i High Level Replacement Parts                                                  7 4  Model 42i High Level Cables                                                                     7 6  Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections                      7 30  RS 232
11.                     C 2  Function Codes                                                                      C 3  MODBUS Commands Supported                                         C 8    Appendix D Geysitech  Bayern Hessen  Protocol                                           D 1    Figures    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  xi    Figures    Model 42i High Level Flow Schematic                                     1 3  Model 42i High Level Rear Panel                                             2 2  Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing                                      2 3  Twin Head Vacuum Pump Installation                                   2 4  42i High Level Front Panel Display                                         3 2  Front Panel Pushbuttons                                                          3 3  Flowchart of Menu Driven Software                                        3 5  Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode         3 9  Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode         3 10  Analog Output in Auto Range Mode                                     3 12  Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Auto Range Mode         3 13  GPT System                                                                             4 3  Inspecting and Replacing the Capillaries                                  5 3  Rebuilding the Pump                                                               5 6  Board Level Connection Diagram   Common Ele
12.                   7 27  DC Power Supply Replacement                                            7 28  Analog Output Testing                                                          7 29  Analog Output Adjustment                                                   7 31  Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement                          7 32  Pressure Transducer Calibration                                            7 34  Temperature Control Board Replacement                             7 36  Ambient Temperature Calibration                                         7 36  Fuse Replacement                                                                  7 38  Scrubber Replacement                                                           7 38  I O Expansion Board  Optional  Replacement                      7 39  Digital Output Board Replacement                                       7 40  Motherboard Replacement                                                    7 41    Contents    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  ix    Measurement Interface Board Replacement                           7 42  Front Panel Board Replacement                                            7 43  LCD Module Replacement                                                   7 44  Service Locations                                                                   7 46    Chapter 8  System Description                                                                         8 1  Hardware     
13.            Range Menu    on page 3 8 describes the gas units  NO  NO2  NOx  ranges  and custom ranges             Averaging Time    on page 3 17 describes the averaging period applied  to NO  NO2  and NOx measurements             Calibration Factors Menu    on page 3 18 describes the calibration  factors used to correct NO  NO2  and NOx measurement readings             Calibration Menu    on page 3 22 describes calibration of zero and span             Instrument Controls Menu    on page 3 29 describes the instrument  hardware control and configuration             Diagnostics Menu    on page 3 64 describes the diagnostic information  and functions             Alarms Menu    on page 3 72 describes a list of items that are monitored  by the analyzer             Service Menu    on page 3 82 describes service related menu items             Password    on page 3 98 describes how to enter change a password   lock and unlock the instrument     Operation  Display    3 2  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Display  The 320 x 240 graphics liquid crystal display  LCD  shows the sample  concentrations  instrument parameters  instrument controls  help  and error  messages  Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one  time  For these menus  use  and  to move the cursor up and  down to each item     Figure 3 1  42i High Level Front Panel Display    CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks  do not let the liquid crystal contact your  skin or clothes  If
14.          3 68  Digital Inputs                                                                     3 69  Relay States                                                                        3 69  Test Analog Outputs                                                          3 69  Instrument Configuration                                                  3 71  Contact Information                                                          3 71  Alarms Menu                                                                         3 72  Internal Temperature                                                         3 73  Chamber Temperature                                                       3 74  Cooler Temperature                                                           3 75  Converter Temperature                                                      3 76  Pressure                                                                              3 77  Flow                                                                                   3 78  Ozonator Flow                                                                   3 78  Zero and Span Check                                                         3 79  Zero and Span Auto Calibration                                         3 80  NO  NO2  and NOx Concentration                                   3 80    Contents    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  vii    Service Menu                                          
15.        Send   set addr dns 192 168 1 1  Receive   set addr dns 192 168 1 1 ok    addr gw  This command reports the default TCP IP gateway address     Send   addr gw  Receive   addr gw 192 168 1 1    set addr gw address  This command sets the default gateway address  where address consists of  four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive  separated by             Send   set addr gw 192 168 1 1  Receive   set addr gw 192 168 1 1 ok    addr ip  This command reports the IP address of the analyzer     Send   addr ip  Receive   addr ip 192 168 1 15    set addr ip address  This command sets the analyzer   s IP address  where address consists of four  numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive  separated by             Send   set addr ip 192 168 1 15  Receive   set addr ip 192 168 1 15 ok    C Link Protocol Commands  Communications Configuration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 37    addr nm  This command reports the TCP IP netmask address     Send   addr nm  Receive   addr nm 255 255 255 0    set addr nm address  This command sets the netmask address  where address consists of four  numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive  separated by             Send   set addr nm 255 255 255 0  Receive   set addr nm 255 255 255 0 ok    baud  This command reports the current baud rate for the serial port   RS232 RS485   The example below reports that the current baud rate is  9600     Send   baud  Receive   baud 9600    set baud rate  rate     1200   2400   4800   9600  
16.       In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Ozonator Safety          Press  to toggle and set the service mode on or off     ANALOG INPUT CAL  ZERO  DISCONNECT SELECTED INPUT   SELECTED INPUT  INPUT 1  CURRENTLY  6 24 V    CALIBRATE INPUT TO ZERO    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ANALOG INPUT CAL  SPAN  PROVIDE VOLTAGE TO INPUT   SELECTED INPUT  INPUT 1  CURRENTLY  6 24 V  SET TO  10 00 V    CALIBRATE TO VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    3 96  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Dilution Ratio  The Dilution Ratio screen allows the user to view and set the dilution ratio   Acceptable values are 1   500  1  The default is 1 1  When this value is set   the dilution ratio is applied to all concentration measurements  This screen  is displayed if the dilution ratio option is installed          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Dilution Ratio          Use        and  to move and change the value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     Display Pixel Test  The Display Pixel Test is used to test the LCD display  The display pixel test  screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode  For more  information on the service mode  see    Service Mode    earlier in the chapter          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Display Pixel Test          Press  to begin test by turning all pixels on  then toggle between  on or off     OZONATOR SAFETY   CURRENTLY  OFF  SET TO  ON    TOGGLE VALUE  RANGE AVG D
17.     2  Disconnect the two PMT high voltage supply cables     3  Loosen the two retaining screws securing the assembly bracket to the  floor plate and slide the assembly towards the rear slightly and lift it off  the base screws     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement    7 16  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Figure 7 8  Replacing the PMT HVPS    4  Loosen two screws on the input box assembly and lift the input box  assembly off the power supply     5  Remove the four screws securing the power supply to the bracket and  remove the power supply     6  To install the power supply  follow the previous steps in reverse     7  Recalibrate the instrument  Refer to the calibration procedures in the     Calibration    chapter     Assembly Bracket    Input Box Screws  2     Assembly Bracket Screws  2   Input Box Assembly    HVPS    Servicing  PMT Voltage Adjustment    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 17    PMT Voltage  Adjustment  Use the following procedure to adjust the PMT voltage after switching from  standard to extended ranges or vice versa     1  Select the NO  NO2  and NOx ranges  Refer to    Range Menu    in the     Calibration    chapter     2  Set the NO BKG and NOx BKG calibration factors to 0
18.     MODBUS Protocol  MODBUS Commands Supported    Thermo Fisher Scientific  42i High Level Instruction Manual  C 9    23  NOT USED    24  PRESSURE ALARM    25  FLOW ALARM    26  OZONE FLOW ALARM    27  MOTHERBOARD STATUS ALARM    28  INTERFACE BD STATUS ALARM    29  I O EXP BD STATUS ALARM    30  NOT USED    31  CONC ALARM    32  SAMPLE MODE    Table C 2  Read Registers for 42i High Level    Register Number  Variable    40001 amp 40002  NO    40003 amp 40004  NO2    40005 amp 40006  NOx    40007 amp 40008  NOT USED    40009 amp 40010  NOT USED    40011 amp 40012  LO NO    40013 amp 40014  LO NO2    40015 amp 40016  LO NOx    40017 amp 40018  NOT USED    40019 amp 40020  NOT USED    40021 amp 40022  HI NO    40023 amp 40024  HI NO2    40025 amp 40026  HI NOx    40027 amp 40028  NOT USED    40029 amp 40030  NOT USED    40031 amp 40032  RANGE  NOx     40033 amp 40034  NOT USED    40035 amp 40036  INT TEMP    40037 amp 40038  CHAMBER TEMP    Table C 1  Read Coils for 42i High Level  continued    Coil Number  Status    MODBUS Protocol  MODBUS Commands Supported    C 10  42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    40039 amp 40040  COOLER TEMP    40041 amp 40042  NO2 CNV TEMP    40043 amp 40044  NOT USED    40045 amp 40046  NOT USED    40047 amp 40048  NOT USED    40049 amp 40050  CHAMBER PRES    40051 amp 40052  FLOW    40053 amp 40054  PMT VOLTS    40055 amp 40056  ANALOG IN 1    40057 amp 40058  ANALOG IN 2    40059 amp 40060  ANALOG IN 3    40061 amp 40062  AN
19.     Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 1    Chapter 7 Servicing    This chapter explains how to replace the Model 42i High Level  subassemblies  It assumes that a subassembly has been identified as defective  and needs to be replaced     For fault location information refer to the    Preventive Maintenance     chapter and the    Troubleshooting    chapter in this manual     The service mode in the    Operation    chapter also includes parameters and  functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems   The service mode includes some of the same information found in the  Diagnostic menu  however  readings are updated every second in the service  mode compared with every 10 seconds in the Diagnostics menu     For additional service assistance  see    Service Locations    at the end of this  chapter     This chapter includes the following parts information and component  replacement procedures             Safety Precautions    on page 7 3            Firmware Updates    on page 7 4            Replacement Parts List    on page 7 4            Cable List    on page 7 6            Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel     on page 7 8            Pump Replacement    on page 7 9            Replacing a Fan    on page 7 11            PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement    on  page 7 11            Photomultiplier Tube Replacement    on page 7 13    Servicing    7 2  Model 42i High Level Instr
20.    LREC FIELDS    gt FIELD 1 NO  FIELD 2 NOX  FIELD 3 PRES  FIELD 4 PMTT  FIELD 5 INTT  FIELD 6 CONVT  FIELD 7 NONE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    DATA IN LREC FIELD 1    gt CONCENTRATIONS  OTHER MEASUREMENTS  ANALOG INPUTS    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 36  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Concentrations  The Concentrations screen allows the user to select the output signal that is  tied to the selected field item  The selected item is shown by     lt       after it   Note that at this point  pressing  indicates that these are proposed  changes as opposed to implemented changes  To change the selected record  format and erase record log file data  see    Commit Content    below  Range   NOx  is visible only in auto range mode          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Select Content  gt  Select Field  gt  Concentrations          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to select a new choice     Other Measurements  The Other Measurements screen allows the user to select the output signal  that is tied to the selected field item  The selected item is shown by     lt        after it  Note that at this point  pressing  indicates that these are  proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes  To change the  selected record format and erase record log file data  see    Commit Content     below          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  
21.   1  Ethernet Output        2  Ethernet Output        3  Ethernet Input        4  NC    5  NC    6  Ethernet Input        7  NC    8  NC    EXPANSION BD  J3  1   5V    2   24V    3   24V    4  Ground    5  Ground    6  Ground    7   RS485 to Expansion Board    8   RS485 to Expansion Board    Troubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  6 9    SPARE DATA  J4  1   5V    2   24V    3   24V    4  Ground    5  Ground    6  Ground    7   RS485 to Spare Board    8   RS485 to Spare Board    I O  J5  1  Power Fail Relay N C  Contact    2  Ground    3  TTL Input 1    4  TTL Input 2    5  Ground    6  TTL Input 5    7  TTL Input 7    8  TTL Input 8    9  TTL Input 10    10  Ground    11  TTL Input 13    12  TTL Input 15    13  Ground    14  Analog Voltage Output 1    15  Analog Voltage Output 3    16  Ground    17  Analog Voltage Output 5    18  Ground    19  Ground    20  Power Fail Relay COM    21  Power Fail Relay N O  Contact    22  Ground    23  TTL Input 3    24  TTL Input 4    25  TTL Input 6    Table 6 3  Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions  continued    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal Descriptions    Troubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    6 10  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    26  Ground    27  TTL Input 9    28  TTL Input 11    29  TTL Input 12    30  TTL Input 14    31  TTL Input 16    32  Ground    33  Analog Voltage Output 2    34  Ana
22.   2     Output format  see    set erec lrec srec format format     command     These commands report the last long and short records stored or the  dynamic data record  In the example below  the command requests a long  record with no checksum  in ASCII format with text  For details on how to  decode the flag fields within these records  see Figure B 1 in the    flags     command     Send   lr01  Receive   lr01  12 31 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no  8413E 1 nox  8485E 1 lono  6471E 1  lonox  6527E 1 pres 130 9 pmtt 53 2 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smplf  0 500 ozonf 0 000 pmtv  115    erec  This command returns a brief description of the main operating conditions  at the time the command is issued  i e  dynamic data   The example below  shows a typical response  The format is defined by the current settings of     format    and    erec format    commands  For details on how to decode the  flag fields within these records  see Figure B 1 in the    flags    command     Send   erec  Receive   erec  10 11 04 06 05 flags DD008000 no 0 000 nox 0 000 no2 0 000 1 lono  147 500 lonox 0 000 lono2 0 000 1 pmtv 805 491 tempal 1 pres 172 278  pcal 150 000 smplf 0 000 ozonf 0 050 hiavgtime 10 loavgtime 10 nobkg  0 000 noxbkg 0 000 nocoef 1 000 noxcoef 1 000 no2coef 1 000 lonocoef  1 000 lonoxcoef 1 000 lono2coef 1 000 norange 100000 000 noxrange  100000 000 no2range 100000 000 lonorange 100000 000 lonoxrange  100000 000 lono2range 100000 000    lrec  srec  lrec xxxx yy  srec xxxx yy  lrec aa 
23.   3  Pull the scrubber off the mounting clips     4  Push the replacement scrubber into the mounting clips     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  I O Expansion Board  Optional  Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 39    5  Attach the Teflon tubing at both ends of the scrubber     6  Replace the cover     Figure 7 17  Replacing the Scrubber    I O Expansion Board   Optional   Replacement    Use the following procedure to replace the optional I O expansion board   Figure 7 18      Equipment Required     I O expansion board    Nut driver  3 16 inch    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Unplug the I O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD  connector on the motherboard     3  Remove the standoffs holding the I O expansion board connector to the  rear panel  Figure 7 19      Ammonia Scrubber    Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  Digital Output Board Replacement    7 40  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    4  Pop off the board from the mounting studs and remove the board     5  To install the I O expansion board  follow
24.   3  Set the high NO2 calibration gas concentration to reflect the sum of the  NO2 concentration generated by GPT and any NO2 impurity     Use  to move the cursor left and right and use  to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor     4  Press  to calculate and save the new high NO2 coefficient based  on the entered span concentration     You can change the calibration factors by using the Calibration Factors  menu  This is often useful in a troubleshooting situation  However  after the  above calibration procedure is completed  all subsequent data reduction  depends on the calibration parameters remaining the same as during the  initial calibration     Therefore never change any calibration factor without first recording the  value so that after any troubleshooting procedure is completed  the initial  value can be re entered thereby not altering the multipoint calibration     Zero and Span Check  The analyzer requires initial and periodic calibration according to the  procedures outlined in this manual  Initially  the frequency of the calibration  procedure should be determined by the stability of the zero and span checks   which may be run daily  You should generate a new calibration curve when  zero and span checks indicate a shift in instrument gain of more than 10  percent from that determined during the most recent multipoint  calibration  You can adjust the frequency of calibration and even zero and  span checks appropriately as you gain confidence w
25.   SET TO  0 800 LPM    MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    RESTORE DEFAULT CAL   RESTORE DEFAULT CAL     RESTORE  RESTORE    ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO x  PRESS  TO CONFIRM RESTORE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 89    Input Board Calibration  The Input Board Calibration menu is used to initiate a calibration of the  input A D stages  The input board calibration menu is visible only when  the instrument is in service mode  For more information on the service  mode  see    Service Mode    on page          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Input Board Calibration     Manual Input Calibration  The Manual Input Calibration screen is used to do a manual calibration of  the input board A D stages     Note The measurement system and the PMT are both shut off inside this  screen          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Input Board Calibration  gt  Manual  Input Cal          Press  to leave warning screen          Make a note of the frequency at gain of 1          Use  and  to change the gain between 10 and 100          Use  and  to increment or decrement the D A counts so  the frequency at gain 100 is equal to the frequency at gain 1     WARNING This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument  service technician     INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION    gt MANUAL INPUT CAL  AUTOMATIC INPUT CAL  INPUT FREQUENCY DISP    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM   
26.   The Interface Board screen  read only  is used to display the current voltage  readings on the interface board          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Voltages  gt  Interface Board  Voltages     I O Board Voltages  The I O Board screen  read only  is used to display the current voltage  readings on the I O expansion board  This screen is displayed if the I O  expansion board option is installed          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Voltages  gt  I O Board  Voltages     MOTHERBOARD VOLTAGES   3 3 SUPPLY 3 3 V  5 0 SUPPLY 5 0 V  15 0 SUPPLY 15 0 V  24 0 SUPPLY 24 0 V   3 3 SUPPLY  3 3 V    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    INTERFACE BOARD VOLTAGES   PMT SUPPLY 785 5 V  3 3 SUPPLY 3 3 V  5 0 SUPPLY 5 0 V  15 0 SUPPLY 15 0 V  P15 0 SUPPLY 15 0 V  24 0 SUPPLY 24 0 V   15 0 SUPPLY  15 0 V    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    I O BOARD VOLTAGES   3 3 SUPPLY 3 3 V  5 0 SUPPLY 5 0 V  15 0 SUPPLY 15 0 V  24 0 SUPPLY 24 0 V   3 0 SUPPLY  3 0 V    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Diagnostics Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 67    Temperatures  The Temperatures screen  read only  displays the internal temperature   reaction chamber temperature  cooler temperature  and converter  temperatures  The internal temperature is the air temperature measured by  a sensor located on the interface board          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Temperatures     Pressure  The Pressure screen  read only  displays the reaction chamber press
27.   high no  high no2  high nox  low no  low no2  low nox  These commands report the measured NO  NO2  and NOx concentrations  when operating in single range  or high and low NO  NO2  and NOx when  operating in dual or auto range mode  The example below shows that the  NO concentration is 62 7 ppm     Send   no  Receive   no 6270E 2 ppm    conv temp  This command reports the current NO2 converter temperature  The  example below reports that the current converter temperature is 625   C     Send   conv temp  Receive   conv temp 625 deg C    cooler temp  This command reports the photomultiplier tube cooler temperature  The  example below reports that the PMT cooler temperature is  2 8   C     Send   pmt temp  Receive   pmt temp  2 8 deg C    flow  This command reports the current measured flow  The example below  reports that the flow measurement is 0 700 LPM     Send   flow  Receive   flow 0 7 l min    internal temp  This command reports the current internal instrument temperature  The  example below shows that the internal temperature is 28 6   C     Send   internal temp  Receive   internal temp 28 6 deg C  actual 28 6    C Link Protocol Commands  Measurements    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 11    pmt temp  This command reports the PMT cooler temperature  The example below  reports that the PMT cooler temperature is  2 8   C     Send   pmt temp  Receive   pmt temp  2 8 deg C    pmt voltage  This command reports the current PMT voltage  The
28.   high range no2  Reports selects current NO2 high range  B 29    high range nox  Reports selects current NOx high range  B 29    host name  Reports sets host name string  B 38    instr name  Reports instrument name  B 39    instrument id  Reports sets instrument id  B 39    internal temp  Reports current internal instrument temperature  B 10    isc  iscreen   Retrieves framebuffer data used for the display  B 27    layout ack  Disables stale layout layout changed indicator            B 40    le  left   Simulates pressing left pushbutton  B 27    list din  Lists current selection for digital input  B 17    list dout  Lists current selection for digital output  B 17    list lrec  Lists current selection lrec logging data  B 17    list sp  Lists current selection in the scratchpad list  B 17    list srec  Lists current selection srec logging data  B 17    list stream  Lists current selection streaming data output  B 17    list var aout  Reports list of analog output  index numbers  and variables  B 43    list var din  Reports list of digital input  index numbers  and variables  B 43    list var dout  Reports list of digital output  index numbers  and variables  B 43    low avg time  Reports sets low averaging time  B 9    low no  Reports NO concentration calculated with low range  coefficients  B 10    low no coef  Reports sets low range NO coefficient  B 25    low no gas  Reports sets low range NO span gas concentration  B 25    low no2  Reports NO2 concentration calculated wi
29.   or reset to normal  Full scale sets the analog outputs to the full scale  voltage  zero sets the analog outputs to 0 volts  and normal operation  The  example below shows the selected output state    ALL    is set to normal          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Test Analog Outputs  gt  ALL   Voltage Channel 1 6  or Current Channel 1 6          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to select a choice     TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS    gt ALL  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 1  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 2  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 3  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 4  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 5  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 6    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    SET ANALOG OUTPUTS   SETTING  ALL  OUTPUT SET TO  NORMAL  SET TO FULL SCALE  SET TO ZERO  RESET TO NORMAL  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Diagnostics Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 71    Instrument Configuration  The Instrument Configuration screen displays information on the hardware  configuration of the instrument     Note If the analyzer is in service mode  pressing  on the item will  toggle it yes or no          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Instrument Configuration          Press  to toggle instrument configuration  in service mode only      Contact Information  The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Contact Information     INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION    gt I O EXPANSION BOARD YES  ZERO SPAN VALVES YES  LAG VOLUME YES  PERM DR
30.   press   gt   to scroll to Service Mode  gt  and press       The Service Mode screen appears     b  Press  to toggle the Service Mode to ON     c   Press   gt   to return to the Main Menu     d  Continue the procedure at the beginning of Step 3 to access the  Calibrate Ambient Temperature screen     4  Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize  use  and  to enter the known temperature  and  press  to save the temperature value     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  Fuse Replacement    7 38  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    5  Install the cover     Fuse Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the fuse     Equipment Required     Replacement fuses     250VAC  4 Amp  SlowBlow  for 100VAC and 110VAC models     250VAC  2 Amp  SlowBlow  for 220 240VAC models     1  Turn instrument OFF and unplug the power cord     2  Remove fuse drawer  located on the AC power connector     3  If either fuse is blown  replace both fuses     4  Insert fuse drawer and reconnect power cord     Scrubber  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the ammonia scrubber  Figure 7 17      Equipment Required     Ammonia scrubber    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Unscrew the Teflon tubing at both ends of the scrubber   
31.  0  Refer to     Calibration Factors Menu    in the    Calibration    chapter     3  Set the NO COEF  NOx COEF  and NO2 COEF to 1 000     4  Set the Averaging Time to 10 seconds  Refer to    Averaging Time    in the     Calibration    chapter     5  Connect the calibration gas and allow the instrument to sample  calibration gas until the reading stabilizes     6  From the Main Menu  press  to scroll to Service  gt  press   gt   to scroll to PMT Voltage Adjustment  gt  and press       The Set PMT Voltage screen appears     If the Service Mode is not displayed on the Main Menu  use the  following procedure to display it     a   At the Main Menu  press  to scroll to Instrument Controls  gt   press   gt   to scroll to Service Mode  gt  and press       The Service Mode screen appears     b  Press  to toggle the Service Mode to ON     c   Press   gt   to return to the Main Menu     d  Continue the procedure at the beginning of Step 6 to display the Set  PMT Voltage screen     WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified  service representatives     Servicing  Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal    7 18  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    7  At the Set PMT Voltage screen  use  to  increment decrement the counts until the instrument displays the  calibration gas concentration value     Reaction Chamber  Cleaning or Removal  Use the following procedure to clean and or remove the reaction chamber   see Figure 7 9      Equi
32.  19200   38400   57600   115200      This command sets the instrument baud rate  The example below sets the  instrument   s baud rate to 115200     Note After the command is sent  the baud rate of the sending device must  be changed to agree with the instrument     Send   set baud 115200  Receive   set baud 115200 ok    dhcp  This command reports the current state of use of DHCP on or off  DHCP  is used to assign an IP address to the analyzer automatically  The example  below shows that DHCP is on     Send   dhcp  Receive   dhcp on    set dhcp onoff  These commands enables and disables the DHCP service by either on or off   Changes to this parameter will only take effect when the analyzer is powered  up  The example below sets the DHCP service on     C Link Protocol Commands  Communications Configuration    B 38  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Note When DHCP is set to on  the user supplied addr gw  addr dns  addr  ip  and addr nm parameters are not used     Send   set dhcp on  Receive   set dhcp on ok    format  This command reports the current reply termination format  The example  below shows that the reply format is 00  which means reply with no  checksum  according to Table B 8     Send   format  Receive   format 00    set format format  This command sets the reply termination format  where format is set  according to Table B 8  The example below sets the reply termination  format to checksum     Send   set format 01  Receive   set fo
33.  2            Basic Command Structure    on page D 2            Block Checksum    on page D 3            Geysitech Commands    on page D 3    The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure  the serial port of the iSeries to support Geysitech protocol     Number of Data bits    8    Number of Stop bits    1    Parity    None    Data rate    from 1200 115200 Baud  9600 is default     Serial Communication  Parameters    Geysitech  Bayern Hessen  Protocol  TCP Communication Parameters    D 2 Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific     iSeries Instruments support the Geysitech TCP protocol over TCP IP  The  register definition is the same as for the serial interface     TCP connection port for Geysitech  9882    The Geysitech instrument address has a value between 0 and 127 and is  represented by 3 digit ASCII number with leading zeros or leading spaces if  required  e g  Instrument address of 1 is represented as 001 or  lt SP gt  lt SP gt 1     The instrument Address is the same as the Instrument ID used for C Link  and MODBUS commands  This can be set via the front panel     The Instrument Address is represented by  lt address gt  in the examples  throughout this document     Note Device IDs 128 through 247 are not supported because of  limitations imposed by the C Link protocol          The following is a list of abbreviations used in this document      lt CR gt  is abbreviation for Carriage Return  ASCII code 0x0D      lt ST
34.  4 Pin    5 Pin    SAMPLE FLOW    TEMP  CONTROL  6 Pin    FAN1  2 Pin    2 Pin    2 Pin  OZONATOR    2 Pin    INPUT BOARD    7 Pin    PMT HV PS    PMT  2 Cond    10 Pin  2 Cond  Coax  PMT ANODE  MJ8    MJ10    PJ8    MJ3    MJ15    PJ9    MJ17    PJ4    PJ5    PJ1    OJ1    PJ10    PJ7    PJ11    J1    OZ FLOW SW    4 Pin    2 Pin    HEATER  15V  1W    amp  OVEN THERM     J2    MJ9    2 Pin  SPARE 1 SOL   PJ12    PJ13    POJ3    POJ1    MJ14    2 Pin    J2  J1    PERM OVEN   OPTIONAL     AC    AC  J4    J3    J5    CONVERTER HEATER  90W     BENCH HEATER  60w     CONVERTER THERMOCOUPLE  2 Pin    3 Pin    4 Pin  AC    AC    IPJ8    P1  2 Pin    24VDC    3 Pin    AC    TO COMMON ELECTRONICS    PJ3  PJ6    Troubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    6 8  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Connector Pin  Descriptions  The connector pin descriptions in Table 6 3 through Table 6 9 can be used  along with the board level connection diagrams to troubleshoot board level  faults     Table 6 3  Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal Descriptions    INTF DATA  J1  1  Ground    2   RS485 to Interface Board    3   RS485 to Interface Board    10 BASE T  J2  1  Ethernet Output        2  Ethernet Output        3  Ethernet Input        4  NC    5  NC    6  Ethernet Input        7  NC    8  NC    INTF DATA  J1  1  Ground    2   RS485 to Interface Board    3   RS485 to Interface Board    10 BASE T  J2
35.  50  HI NOx RANGE 100  LO NOx RANGE 50    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    SET CUSTOM RANGES    Operation  Range Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 9    Figure 3 4  Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode    Table 3 2  Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode    Note All channels are user definable  If any customization has been made to  the analog output configuration  the default selections may not apply     Channel  Pin  Description    1  14  NO Analog Output    2  33  NO2 Analog Output    3  15  NOx Analog Output    4  34  None    5  17  None    6  36  None    Ground  16  18  19  35  37  Signal Ground    Operation  Range Menu    3 10  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Dual Range Mode  In the dual range mode  there are two independent channels defined for  each compound being measured  These are labeled simply as the    High  Range    and the    Low Range     Each channel has its own analog output  range  averaging time and span coefficient     This enables the sample concentration readings to be sent to the analog  outputs using two different ranges  For example  the low NO analog output  can be set to output concentrations from 0 to 50 ppm and the high NO  analog output set to output concentrations from 0 to 100 ppm     In addition to each channel having two ranges  each channel has two span  coefficients  There are two span coefficients so that each range can be  
36.  AUTOCAL OK  SPAN AUTOCAL OK  NO CONCENTRATION OK  NO2 CONCENTRATION OK  NOx CONCENTRATION OK  MOTHERBOARD STATUS OK  INTERFACE STATUS OK  I O EXP STATUS OK    Operation  Alarms Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 73    Internal Temperature  The Internal Temperature screen displays the current internal temperature  and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits  Acceptable alarm limits  range from 8 to 47   C  If the internal temperature reading goes beyond  either the minimum or maximum alarm limit  an alarm is activated  The  word    ALARM    appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Internal Temp     Min and Max Internal  Temperature Limits  The Minimum Internal Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change  the minimum internal temperature alarm limit  The minimum and  maximum internal temperature screens function the same way          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Internal Temp  gt  Min or Max          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     INTERNAL TEMPERATURE   ACTUAL 28 6 oC   gt MIN 15 0 oC  MAX 45 0 oC    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    INTERNAL TEMPERATURE   ACTUAL MIN  15 0 oC  SET MIN TO  16 0 oC      INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Alarms Menu    3 74  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Chamber Temperature  The Chamber Temperature screen
37.  Bytes  0x0000 to 0xFFFF  Number of following bytes     Unit Identifier  1 Byte  0x00 to 0xFF  Passed back in response     MODBUS Protocol  Function Codes    Thermo Fisher Scientific  42i High Level Instruction Manual  C 3    A Slave address is not required in MODBUS over TCP IP because the  higher level protocols include device addressing  The unit identifier is not  used by the instrument     Function Code  The function code is a single byte in length  The following function codes  are supported by the instrument     Read Coils     0x01    Read Inputs     0x02    Read Holding Registers     0x03    Read Input Registers     0x04    Force  Write  Single Coil     0x05    Read Exception Status     0x07    If a function code is received that is not in this list  and invalid function  exception is returned     Data  The data field varies depending on the function  For more description of  these data fields  see    Function Codes    below     Error Check  In MODBUS over Serial an error check is included in the message  This is  not necessary in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols  ensure error free transmission  The error check is a two byte  16 bit  CRC  value     Function Codes  This section describes the various function codes that are supported by the  Model 42i High Level      0x01 0x02  Read Coils    Read Inputs  Read Coils Inputs reads the status of the digital outputs  relays  in the  instrument  Issuing either of these function codes will generate the sam
38.  Calibration  gt  Span          Use        and  to move and change the value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     Restore Default Pressure  Calibration  The Restore Default Pressure Calibration screen allows the user to reset the  pressure calibration configuration values to factory defaults          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Pressure Calibration  gt  Set  Defaults          Press  to warn user and enable restore with            Use  to overwrite pressure sensor calibration parameters with  factory default values when pressed after       CALIBRATE PRESSURE SPAN   CURRENTLY  33 8 mmHg  SET TO  760 0 mmHg      MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    RESTORE DEFAULT CAL   RESTORE DEFAULT CAL     RESTORE  RESTORE    ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO x  PRESS  TO CONFIRM RESTORE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 87    Flow Calibration  The Flow Calibration menu is used to calibrate the flow sensor to zero   span  or restore factory default values  The flow calibration menu is visible  only when the instrument is in service mode  For more information on the  service mode  see    Service Mode    earlier in the chapter          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Flow Calibration     Calibrate Flow Zero  The Calibrate Flow Zero screen calibrates the flow sensor at zero flow     Note The pump must be disconnected before performing
39.  Check the pump for a tear in  the diaphragm  replace with  pump repair kit if necessary     Refer to    Preventive  Maintenance    chapter in  this manual  Check that  capillaries are properly  installed and O rings are in  good shape  Replace if  necessary  Check flow  system for leaks     Alarm   Sample flow  Sample flow    Low     Check sample capillary   015  inch ID  for blockage   Replace as necessary     If using sample particulate  filter make sure it is not  blocked  Disconnect sample  particulate filter from the  sample bulkhead  if flow  increases  replace the filter     Table 6 2  Troubleshooting   Alarm Messages  continued    Alarm Message  Possible Cause  Action    Troubleshooting  Troubleshooting Guides    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  6 5    Alarm   Ozonator Flow  Ozone flow low  Check ozone capillary   008  inch ID  for blockage   Replace as necessary     Alarm   NO  NO2  NOX  Conc   Concentration has exceeded range  limit  Check to insure range  corresponds with expected  value  If not select proper  range     Concentration low  Check user defined low set  point  set to zero     Table 6 2  Troubleshooting   Alarm Messages  continued    Alarm Message  Possible Cause  Action    Troubleshooting  Board Level Connection Diagrams    6 6  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Board Level  Connection Diagrams    Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 are board level connection diagrams for the  common electroni
40.  DB Connector Pin Configurations                                              8 12  RS 485 DB Connector Pin Configuration                                               8 12  Mounting Options                                                                                     9 5  C Link Protocol Commands                                                                     B 3  Averaging Times                                                                                       B 9  Alarm Trigger Values                                                                              B 16  Record Output Formats                                                                          B 20  Stream Time Values                                                                                B 24  Operating Ranges                                                                                    B 29  Contrast Levels                                                                                        B 33  Reply Termination Formats                                                                    B 38  Analog Current Output Range Values                                                    B 40  Analog Voltage Output Range Values                                                     B 41  Default Output Assignment                                                                    B 42  Read Coils for 42i High Level                                                                   C 8  Read Re
41.  DESCRIPTOR IN1  UNITS V  DECIMAL PLACES 2  TABLE POINTS 2  POINT 1  POINT 2    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 58  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Descriptor  The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor for the selected  analog input channel  The descriptor is used in datalogging and streaming  data to report what data is being sent out  The descriptor may be from 1 to  3 characters in length  and defaults to IN1 to IN8  user input channel  number           In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Analog Input Config  gt  Select Channel  gt  Descriptor          Press  to save the new descriptor     Units  The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog  input channel  The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in  datalogging and streaming data  The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in  length  and defaults to V  volts           In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Analog Input Config  gt  Select Channel  gt  Units          Press  to save the new value     ANALOG INPUT DESCRIPTOR   CURRENTLY  IN1    IN1    ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP  OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE  0123456789     SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ANALOG INPUT UNITS   CURRENTLY  V    VSS    ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP  OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE  0123456789     SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scien
42.  Figure 2 2  Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing    2  Connect the air dryer to the DRY AIR bulkhead     3  Connect the pump vacuum port  inlet  to the CHAMBER bulkhead   Figure 2 3      Instrument Bulkhead    Input Gas Line    Vent to Exhaust Line  at Atmospheric Pressure    SAMPLE    Equipment Damage DO NOT connect the pump exhaust port to the  CHAMBER bulkhead  This can cause permanent damage to both the  cooler and the photomultiplier tube     Installation  Setup Procedure    2 4  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Figure 2 3  Twin Head Vacuum Pump Installation    4  Connect the pump exhaust to a suitable vent or ozone scrubber     Note The exhaust line used to connect the pump to the instrument should  be 1 4 inch OD with a minimum ID of 1 8 inch  The length of the exhaust  line should be less than 10 feet  Verify that there is no restriction in this line      5  Plug the pump into an outlet of the appropriate voltage and frequency     6  If the instrument is equipped with a bypass pump  connect the BYPASS  chamber to the accumulator and connect the accumulator to the bypass  inlet     7  Connect the bypass pump exhaust to a suitable vent or ozone scrubber     Installation  Startup    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  2 5    8  Connect a suitable recording device to the rear panel connector  See the     Operation    chapter for more information about the rear panel  pin outs     9  Plug the instrument into a
43.  Fins Inspection and Cleaning    on page 5 4            Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning    on page 5 4            Pump Rebuilding    on page 5 5    Safety Precautions  Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter     Replacement Parts  See the    Servicing    chapter for a list of replacement parts     WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the  manufacturer  the protection provided by the equipment may be  impaired     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component  For more information  about appropriate safety precautions  see the    Servicing    chapter     Preventive Maintenance  Cleaning the Outside Case    5 2  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Cleaning the Outside  Case  Clean the outside case using a damp cloth being careful not to damage the  labels on the case     Ozonator Air Feed  Drying Column  Replacement    Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator air feed drying column     1  Remove the drying column from the connector DRY AIR bulkhead on  the rear panel of the instrument     2  Replace spent absorbent material  indicating Drierite or silica gel  with  regenerated material     3  Reinstall the drying column to the DRY AIR bulkhead     4  Perform a Zero Span check  see the    Calibration    chapter      Capilla
44.  High Level Instruction Manual  B 45    Format Specifier for ASCII  Responses  The first line of the Layout response is the scanf like parameter list for  parsing the fields from an ASCII ERec response  Parameters are separated  by spaces and the line is terminated by a  n  the normal line separator  character   Valid fields are      s   parse a string   d   parse a decimal number   ld   parse a long  32 bit  decimal number   f   parse a floating point number   x   parse a hexadecimal number   lx   parse a long  32 bit  hex number       ignore the field    Note signed versus unsigned for the integer values does not matter  it is  handled automatically     Format Specifier for  Binary Responses  The second line of the Layout response is the binary parameter list for  parsing the fields from a binary response  Parameters MUST be separated  by spaces  and the line is terminated by a   n   Valid fields are     t   parse a time specifier  2 bytes   D   parse a date specifier  3 bytes   i   ignore one 8 bit character  1 byte   e   parse a 24 bit floating point number  3 bytes  n x   E   parse a 24 bit floating point number  3 bytes  N x   f   parse a 32 bit floating point number  4 bytes     c   parse an 8 bit signed number  1 byte   C   parse an 8 bit unsigned number  1 byte   n   parse a 16 bit signed number  2 bytes   N   parse a 16 bit unsigned number  2 bytes   m   parse a 24 bit signed number  3 bytes   M   parse a 24 bit unsigned number  3 bytes   l   parse a 32 bit signed n
45.  Interface Board    Capillaries  2     Fan    System Description  Ozonator    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  8 3    The reaction chamber is heated and controlled to approximately 50   C in  order to ensure the greatest instrument stability  The sample and ozone flow  capillaries and a thermistor sensor are also housed in on the reaction  chamber assembly     Optical Filter  The optical filter housed in the reaction chamber limits the spectral region  viewed by the detector and eliminates possible interferences due to other  chemiluminescent reactions     Pressure Transducer  The pressure transducer measures the reaction chamber pressure     Ozonator  The ozonator generates the necessary ozone concentration required for the  chemiluminescent reaction  The ozone reacts with the NO in the ambient  air sample to produce the electronically excited NO2 molecules     Ozonator Flow Switch  The ozonator flow switch located at the ozonator inlet completes an  electrical safety circuit when air flows through the sensor to the ozonator  If  airflow stops  the flow sensor breaks the electrical circuit to the ozonator  and shuts it off to prevent the ozonator from overheating     Photomultiplier Tube  The photomultiplier tube  PMT  provides the infrared sensitivity required  to detect the NO2 luminescence resulting from the reaction of the ozone  with the ambient air sample     Optical energy from the reaction is converted to an electrical signal by the 
46.  Model 42i  High Level  Instruction Manual  Chemiluminescence NO NO2 NOx Analyzer  Part Number 101903 00  20Dec2007       2007 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc  All rights reserved   Specifications  terms and pricing are subject to change  Not all products are available in all countries  Please  consult your local sales representative for details   Thermo Fisher Scientific  Air Quality Instruments  27 Forge Parkway  Franklin  MA 02038  1 508 520 0430  www thermo com aqi     Thermo Fisher Scientific  WEEE Compliance    WEEE Compliance    This product is required to comply with the European Union   s Waste  Electrical  amp  Electronic Equipment  WEEE  Directive 2002 96 EC  It is  marked with the following symbol            Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more  recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State  and this product  should be disposed of or recycled through them  Further information on  Thermo Fisher Scientific   s compliance with these Directives  the recyclers  in your country  and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products  which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive  are available at  www thermo com WEEERoHS     Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  v    Contents    Chapter 1  Introduction                                                                                      1 1  Principle of Operation                                                             1 2  Specifications
47.  PMT     Digital Output Board  The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides  solenoid driver outputs and relay contact outputs to a connector located on  the rear panel of the instrument  Ten relay contacts normally open  with  power off  are provided which are electrically isolated from each other  Eight  solenoid driver outputs  open collector  are provided along with a  corresponding  24VDC supply pin on the connector     I O Expansion Board   Optional   The I O expansion board connects to the motherboard and adds the  capability to input external analog voltage inputs and to output analog  currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument  It  contains local power supplies  a DC DC isolator supply  a sub processor and    System Description  I O Components    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  8 9    analog circuits  Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input  voltage range of 0V to 10VDC  Six current outputs are provided with a  normal operating range of 0 to 20 mA     Front Panel Connector  Board  The front panel connector board interfaces between the motherboard and  the front panel mounted function key panel and Graphics display  It serves  as central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key  panel  the graphics display control lines  and the graphics display backlight  to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard  This board also  includes signal
48.  PMT and sent to the input board that transmits it to the processor     Photomultiplier Tube  Cooler  The thermoelectric PMT cooler reduces the PMT temperature to  approximately  3   C to minimize dark current and increase instrument  sensitivity  The cooler helps to increase zero and span stability over a wide  ambient temperature range  The cooler housing also shields the PMT from  external electrical and optical interferences     External Pump  The external vacuum pump draws the reacted gasses out of the reaction  chamber     Sample Capillary  The sample capillary along with the pump is used to control flow in the  sample line     System Description  Software    8 4  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Dry Air Capillary  The dry air capillary along with the pump is used to control flow in the dry  air line     Software  The processor software tasks are organized into four areas          Instrument Control         Monitoring Signals         Measurement Calculations         Output Communications    Instrument Control  Low level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on  the boards  such as analog and digital I O and heater control  These  processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high level  processor that also controls the front panel user interface  The low level  processors all run a common piece of firmware that is bundled with the  high level firmware and loaded on power up if a different vers
49.  PMT cooler temperature alarm maximum value  B 13    alarm cooler temp  min  Reports sets PMT cooler temperature alarm minimum value  B 14    alarm internal temp  max  Reports sets internal temperature alarm maximum value  B 14    alarm internal temp  min  Reports sets internal temperature alarm minimum value  B 14    alarm pressure max  Reports sets pressure alarm maximum value  B 14    alarm pressure min  Reports sets pressure alarm minimum value  B 14    alarm sample flow  max  Reports sets sample flow  or bypass flow if installed  alarm  maximum value  B 15    alarm sample flow  min  Reports sets sample flow  or bypass flow if installed  alarm  minimum value  B 15    alarm trig conc no  Reports sets current NO concentration alarm warning value  B 15    alarm trig conc no2  Reports sets current NO2 concentration alarm warning value  B 15    alarm trig conc nox  Reports sets current NOx concentration alarm warning value  B 15    C Link Protocol Commands  Commands    B 4  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    analog iout range  Reports analog current output range per channel  B 40    analog vin  Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel  B 40    analog vout range  Reports analog voltage output range per channel  B 41    avg time  Reports sets averaging time  B 9    baud  Reports sets current baud rate  B 37    cal high no coef  Sets auto calibrates high range NO coefficient  B 24    cal high no2 coef  Sets auto calibrates high range NO2 c
50.  Send   set analog iout range 4 1  Receive   set analog iout range 4 1 ok    analog vin channel  This command retrieves the analog voltage input channel data  both the  calculated value and the actual voltage  In the example below  the     calculated    value of channel 1 is 75 325 degrees F  volts are 2 796  This  command responds with    feature not enabled    if the I O expansion board is  not detected     Send   analog vin 1  Receive   analog vin 1 75 325 2 796    Table B 9  Analog Current Output Range Values    Range  Output Range    1  0 20 mA    2  4 20 mA    0  cannot be set to this  but may report   Undefined    C Link Protocol Commands  I O Configuration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 41    analog vout range channel  This command reports the analog voltage output channel range  where  channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive  according to Table B 10     Send   analog vout range 2  Receive   analog vout range 2 3    set analog vout range channel range  This command sets analog voltage output channel to the range  where  channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive  and range is set according to  Table B 10  The example below sets channel 2 to the 0 10 V range     Send   set analog vout range 2 3  Receive   set analog vout range 2 3 ok    dig in  This command reports the status of the digital inputs as a 4 digit  hexadecimal string with the most significant bit  MSB  being input 16     Send   dig in  Receive   dig in 0xff7f    din channel 
51.  Signal  Description    Troubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    6 18  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Table 6 6  I O Expansion Board  Optional  Connector Pin Descriptions    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal  Description    EXPANSION I O  J1  1  Analog Voltage Input 1    2  Analog Voltage Input 2    3  Analog Voltage Input 3    4  Ground    5  Analog Voltage Input 4    6  Analog Voltage Input 5    7  Analog Voltage Input 6    8  Ground    9  Analog Voltage Input 7    10  Analog Voltage Input 8    11  Ground    12  NC    13  NC    14  Ground    15  Current Output 1    16  Current Output Return    17  Current Output 2    18  Current Output Return    19  Current Output 3    20  Current Output Return    21  Current Output 4    22  Current Output Return    23  Current Output 5    24  Current Output Return    25  Current Output 6    MOTHER BD  J2  1   5V    2   24V    3   24V    4  Ground    5  Ground    6  Ground    Troubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  6 19    7   RS485 to Motherboard    8   RS485 to Motherboard    Table 6 7  Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal  Description    MOTHER BD  J1  1   5V    2   24V    3   24V    4  Ground    5  Ground    6  Ground    7  SPI Reset    8  SPI Input    9  SPI Output    10  SPI Board Select    11  SPI Clock    DIGITAL  OUTPUTS  J
52.  This command reports the action assigned to input channel and the  corresponding active state  The example below reports the input 5 to be  assigned an index number 9 corresponding to action of    analog outputs to  zero    with the active state being high     Send   din 5  Receive   din 5 9 AOUTS TO ZERO high    set din channel index state  This command assigns digital input channel  1 16  to activate the action  indicated by index  1 35   when the input transitions to the designated state   high or low   Use    list din var    command to obtain the list of supported  index values and corresponding actions     Table B 10  Analog Voltage Output Range Values    Range  Output Range    1  0 1 V    2  0 100 mV    3  0 10 V    4  0 5 V    0  cannot be set to this  but may report   Undefined    C Link Protocol Commands  I O Configuration    B 42  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Send   set din 1 3 high  Receive   set din 1 3 high ok    dout channel  This command reports the index number and output variable and the active  state assigned to output channel  The example below reports the input 4 to  be assigned an index number 11 corresponding to    general alarm    with the  active state being open     Send   dout 4  Receive   dout 4 11 GEN ALARM open    set dout channel index state  This command assigns digital output channel to be assigned to the action  associated with index  and assigns it an active state of state  open or closed      Send   s
53.  To COOLER on Measurement  Interface Board    Temp  Control Board     Two Not Shown     Servicing  Photomultiplier Tube Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 13    7  Loosen four captive screws holding cooler to floor plate and remove the  cooler assembly with the reaction chamber     Note If only the cooler is being replaced  remove the PMT and reaction  chamber from the old cooler and install them on the new cooler     Fasten knurled fittings on reaction chamber finger tight     Make sure that the heat shrink covered tubing between the reaction  chamber and the converter is light tight at the connections     8  Install new cooler by following previous steps in reverse     9  Re install the measurement bench  Refer to    Removing the  Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel    in this chapter     Photomultiplier Tube  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the PMT tube     Equipment Required     Photomultiplier tube and PMT base    Nut driver  5 16 inch    Flat blade screwdriver    Philips screwdriver  small    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Disconnect the high voltage cable from the PMT power supply and  unplug the BNC cable from the Input Board     3  Remove six external screws holding PMT cover plate and the four  screws holding the PMT shroud to the panel and remove the PMT    Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of stati
54.  WARNING This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument  service technician     Operation  Service Menu    3 90  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific         Press  to save new input board calibration     Automatic Input Calibration  The Automatic Input Calibration screen is used to do a automatic  calibration of the input board A D stages     Note The measurement system and the PMT are both shut off inside this  screen          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Input Board Calibration  gt   Automatic Input Cal          Press  to leave warning screen and begin automatic calibration     INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION   GAIN 1   MANUAL     TO CALIBRATE  FREQ   4500  D A   N A    XXXXXX   WARNING   XXXXXXX  THIS ACTION MAY REQUIREXX    CHG GAIN  RECALIBRATION OF THEXXXX    SAVE VALUES  ENTIRE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM     RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    WARNING This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument  service technician     INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION   INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION     TO CALIBRATE     IN PROGRESS     D A   2047  XXXXXX   WARNING   XXXXXXX    TARGET   0  THIS ACTION MAY REQUIREXX    FREQ   0 0  RECALIBRATION OF THEXXXX    ZERO   0 CNT   1  ENTIRE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM     RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 91    Input Frequency Display  The Frequency Display screen is used to manually adjust the input bo
55.  and  remove the pressure transducer assembly     5  To install the pressure transducer assembly  follow previous steps in  reverse     6  Calibrate the pressure transducer  Refer to the    Pressure Transducer  Calibration    procedure that follows     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Retaining Screws  2     Pressure Transducer Assembly    Servicing  Pressure Transducer Calibration    7 34  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Pressure Transducer  Calibration  Use the following procedure to calibrate the pressure transducer     Equipment Required     Vacuum pump    Note An error in the zero setting of the pressure transducer does not  introduce a measurable error in the output concentration reading   Therefore  if only a barometer is available and not a vacuum pump  only  adjust the span setting     A rough check of the pressure accuracy can be made by obtaining the  current barometric pressure from the local weather station or airport and  comparing it to the pressure reading  However  since these pressures are  usually corrected to sea level  it may be necessary to correct the reading to  local pressure by subtracting 0 027 mm Hg per foot of altitude     Do not try to calibrate the pressure transducer unless the pressure is known  accurately     1  Remove the cover     2  Disconnec
56.  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to save the averaging time     AVERAGING TIME   CURRENTLY  30 SEC  SET TO  10 SEC    CHANGE VALUE  SAVE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Calibration Factors Menu    3 18  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Calibration Factors  Menu  Calibration factors are used to correct the NO  NO2  and NOx  concentration readings that the instrument generates using its own internal  calibration data  The Calibration Factors menu displays the calibration  factors  The screens below show the calibration factors menu in single mode  and dual auto range modes     Normally  the instrument is calibrated automatically using the commands  listed in the Calibration menu described later in this chapter  However  the  instrument can also be calibrated manually using the Calibration Factors  menu     To manually calibrate the instrument  see    NO and NOx Backgrounds         NO  NO2  and NOx Span Coefficients     and    Calibration Pressure    below          In the Main Menu  choose Calibration Factors     NO and NOx Backgrounds  The NO and NOx background corrections are determined during zero  calibration  The NO background is the amount of signal read by the  analyzer in the NO channel while sampling zero air  The NOx background  is the amount of signal read by the analyzer in the NOx channel while  sampling zero air  Although the background is expressed in terms of  concentration  the background si
57.  and NOx  concentrations using the above equations for  NO OUT and  NOx OUT     3  Record the NO and NOx responses     4  Plot the analyzer responses versus the respective calculated NO and  NOx concentrations and draw or calculate the respective calibration  curves  For subsequent calibrations where linearity can be assumed   these curves may be checked with a three point calibration consisting of  a zero point  NO and NOx concentrations of approximately 80  of the  URL  and an intermediate concentration    5  Adjust the GPT system to generate a NO concentration near 90  of  the URL of the instrument range selected     6  Sample this NO concentration until the NO and NOx responses have  stabilized  then measure and record the NO concentration as  NO ORIG     7  Adjust the O3 generator in the GPT system to generate sufficient O3 to  produce a decrease in the NO concentration equivalent to about 80   of the URL of the NO2 range  The decrease must not exceed 90  of  the NO concentration determined in Steps 5 and 6 above     Z     100  x  URL     NO        scale       Response  Recorder  NO  OUT  x    x    Calibration  Calibration    4 10  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    8  When the analyzer responses stabilize  record the resultant NO  concentrations as  NO  REM     9  From the Main Menu choose Calibration  gt  Cal NO2 Coefficient     The NO2 line of the Calibrate NO2 screen displays the current NO2  concentration  The SPAN CONC line of the 
58.  below reports that the measurement mode is set to NO     Send   meas mode  Receive   meas mode no    set meas mode mode  mode     no nox   no   nox      This command sets the instrument to NO NOx  auto  mode  manual NO  mode  or manual NOx mode  The example below sets the instrument to the  manual NO mode     C Link Protocol Commands  Hardware Configuration    B 32  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Send   set meas mode no  Receive   set meas mode no ok    pres comp  This command reports whether pressure compensation is on or off  The  example below shows that pressure compensation is on     Send   pres comp  Receive   pres comp on    set pres comp onoff  These commands turn the pressure compensation on or off  The example  below turns pressure compensation off     Send   set pres comp off  Receive   set pres comp off ok    temp comp  This command reports whether temperature compensation is on or off  The  example below shows the temperature compensation is off     Send   temp comp  Receive   temp comp off    set temp comp onoff  These commands turn the temperature compensation on or off  The  example below turns temperature compensation off     Send   set temp comp off  Receive   set temp comp off ok    Hardware  Configuration    contrast  This command reports the screen   s level of contrast  The example below  shows the screen contrast is 50   according to Table B 7     Send   contrast  Receive   contrast 5  50     set contrast level  Th
59.  buffers for the graphics display control signals and a high  voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight     I O Components  External I O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the  following devices          Analog output  voltage and current          Analog input  voltage          Digital output  TTL levels          Digital input  TTL levels     Note The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I O support for  future expansion     Analog Voltage Outputs  The instrument provides six analog voltage outputs  Each may be software  configured for any one of the following ranges  while maintaining a  minimum resolution of 12 bits          0 100mV         0 1V         0 5V         0 10V    The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through  firmware  At least 5  of full scale over and under range are also supported     System Description  I O Components    8 10  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic  channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter  The  voltage outputs are independent of the current outputs     Analog Current Outputs   Optional   The optional I O Expansion board includes six isolated current outputs   These are software configured for any one of the following ranges  while  maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits          0 20 mA         4 20 mA    The user can calibrate each an
60.  by the instrument   s password status          In the Main Menu  choose Password     Set Password  The Set Password screen is used to set the password to unlock the front  panel  The set password is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the  password not set          In the Main Menu  choose Password  gt  Set Password          Press  to enter password and disable instrument lock     PASSWORD MENU    gt SET PASSWORD  LOCK INSTRUMENT  CHANGE PASSWORD  REMOVE PASSWORD  UNLOCK INSTRUMENT    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ENTER NEW PASSWORD   ASSSSSSSSS  ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP  OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE  0123456789     SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Password    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 99    Lock Instrument  The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instrument   s front panel so  users can not change any settings from the front panel  The lock instrument  is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password set          In the Main Menu  choose Password  gt  Lock Instrument          Press  to enable instrument lock and returns to main menu     Change Password  The Change Password is used to change the password used to unlock the  instrument   s front panel  The change password is shown if the instrument is  unlocked          In the Main Menu  choose Password  gt  Change Password          Press  to change password     LOCK FRONT PANEL   xxxPRESSING ENTER WILLxxxx  PREVENT USER FROM CHANGING  xCONFIG FROM FRONT PANELxx    LOCK AND R
61.  commands  if  required     Send   set malloc lrec 10  Receive   set malloc lrec 10 ok    set copy sp to lrec  set copy sp to srec  set copy sp to stream  These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad  sp  into the  long record  short record  or streaming data list  The example below copies  the current list in scratch pad into the long records list     Send   set copy sp to lrec  Receive   set copy sp to lrec ok    set copy lrec to sp  set copy srec to sp  set copy stream to sp  These commands copy the current contents of the long record  short record   or streaming data list into the scratch pad  sp   These commands are useful  in easy modification of current long record  short record  or streaming data  lists  The example below copies the current list of long records into the  scratch pad     Send   set copy lrec to sp  Receive   set copy lrec to sp ok    sp field number  This command reports the variable number and name stored at index in the  scratch pad list  The example below shows that the field 5 in the scratch pad  is set to index number 13  which is for the variable NOx concentration     Send   sp field 5  Receive   sp field 5 13 pres    C Link Protocol Commands  Datalogging    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 23    sp field number value  number   1 32 is the maximum number of fields in long and short record  lists   number   1 18 is for streaming data lists     This command sets the scratch pad field number  item num
62.  commands report the NO  NO2  and NOx coefficients in single  range mode  or the high and low range coefficients in dual or auto range  mode  If the mode is incorrect  the instrument responds with    can   t  wrong  settings     The example below reports that the NO coefficient is 1 000     Send   no coef  Receive   no coef 1 000    set no coef value  set no2 coef value  set nox coef value  set high no coef value  set high no2 coef value  set high nox coef value  set low no coef value  set low no2 coef value  set low nox coef value  These commands set the NO  NO2  and NOx coefficients to user defined  values to value  where value is a floating point representation of the  coefficient  The example below sets the NO coefficient to 1 005     Send   set no coef 1 005  Receive   set no coef 1 005 ok    no gas  no2 gas  nox gas  high no gas  high no2 gas  high nox gas  low no gas  low no2 gas  low nox gas    These commands report the low NO  NO2  and NOx span gas  concentrations used to auto calibrate low NO  NO2  and NOx coefficients   The high and low commands are only available in dual and auto range    C Link Protocol Commands  Calibration    B 26  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    mode  If the mode is incorrect  the instrument responds with    can   t  wrong  settings     The example below shows that the NO low span gas  concentration is 240 0 ppm     Send   low no gas  Receive   low no gas 2400E 1 ppm    set no gas value  set no2 gas value  
63.  cooler temperature alarm limits in degrees C  The example  below sets the cooler temperature alarm maximum value to  2 0   C     Send   set alarm cooler temp max  2  Receive   set alarm cooler temp max  2 ok    alarm internal temp min  alarm internal temp max  These commands report the internal temperature alarm minimum and  maximum value current settings  The example below reports that the  internal temperature alarm minimum value is 15 0   C     Send   internal temp alarm min  Receive   internal temp alarm min 15 0 deg C    set internal temp alarm min value  set internal temp alarm max value  These commands set the internal temperature alarm minimum and  maximum values to value  where value is a floating point number  representing internal temperature alarm limits in degrees C  The example  below sets the internal temperature alarm maximum value to 35 0   C     Send   set internal temp alarm max 35  Receive   set internal temp alarm max 35 ok    alarm pressure min  alarm pressure max  These commands report the pressure alarm minimum and maximum value  current settings  The example below reports that the pressure alarm  minimum value is 20 mmHg     C Link Protocol Commands  Alarms    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 15    Send   pressure alarm min  Receive   pressure alarm min 20 mm Hg    set alarm pressure min value  set alarm pressure max value  These commands set the pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to  value  where value is a
64.  displays the current chamber  temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits  Acceptable  alarm limits range from 47 to 51   C  If the chamber temperature reading  goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit  an alarm is activated   The word    ALARM    appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Chamber Temp     Min and Max Chamber  Temperature Limits  The Minimum Chamber Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change  the minimum chamber temperature alarm limit  The minimum and  maximum internal temperature screens function the same way          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Chamber Temp  gt  Min or Max          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     CHAMBER TEMPERATURE   ACTUAL 49 0 oC   gt MIN 47 0 oC  MAX 51 0 oC    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CHAMBER TEMPERATURE   ACTUAL MIN  47 0 oC  SET MIN TO  48 0 oC      INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Alarms Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 75    Cooler Temperature  The Cooler Temperature screen displays the current cooler temperature and  sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits  Acceptable alarm limits  range from  25 to  1   C  If the cooler temperature reading goes beyond  either the minimum or maximum limit  an alarm is activated  The word     ALARM    appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu          In th
65.  example below  reports that the current PMT voltage is  750 volts     Send   pmt voltage  Receive   pmt voltage  750    pres  This command reports the current reaction chamber pressure  The example  below shows that the actual reaction chamber pressure is 33 8 mmHg     Send   pres  Receive   pres 33 8 mm Hg    react temp  This command reports the current reaction chamber temperature  The  example below reports that the current reaction chamber temperature is  49 0   C     Send   react temp  Receive   react temp 49 0 deg C    flags  This reports 8 hexadecimal digits  or flags  that represent status of the  ozonator  PMT  pressure and temperature compensation status  gas units   gas mode  and alarms  To decode the flags  each hexadecimal digit is  converted to binary as shown in the Figure B 1  It is the binary digits that  define the status of each parameter  In the example below  the instrument is  reporting that the ozonator and PMT are both on  that the instrument is in  the span gas mode  that at least one of the alarm temperature is activated   and that the NO2 high concentration alarm is activated     Send   flags  Receive   flags C0028008    C Link Protocol Commands  Alarms    B 12  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Figure B 1  Flag Status    Alarms  alarm chamber temp min  alarm chamber temp max  These commands report the chamber temperature alarm minimum and  maximum value current settings  The example below reports that the  chambe
66.  feet  and front panel  side trim ears     EIA rack  Mounted in an EIA style rack  includes mounting slides  and front  panel EIA rack mounting ears     Retrofit rack  Mounted in a Thermo non EIA rack  includes mounting slides  and  retrofit front panel rack mounting ears     Optional Equipment  Mounting Options    9 6  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Figure 9 4  Bench Mounting    Optional Equipment  Mounting Options    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  9 7    Figure 9 5  EIA Rack Mounting    Optional Equipment  Mounting Options    9 8  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Figure 9 6  Retrofit Rack Mounting    Thermo Fisher Scientific  42i High Level Instruction Manual  A 1    Appendix A Warranty    Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in  conformance with Seller s published specifications and be free from defects  in material and workmanship  when subjected to normal  proper and  intended usage by properly trained personnel  for the period of time set  forth in the product documentation  published specifications or package  inserts  If a period of time is not specified in Seller   s product  documentation  published specifications or package inserts  the warranty  period shall be one  1  year from the date of shipment to Buyer for  equipment and ninety  90  days for all other products  the  Warranty  Period    Seller agrees during the Warra
67.  floating point number representing pressure alarm  limits in millimeters of mercury  The example below sets the pressure alarm  maximum value to 90 mmHg     Send   set alarm pressure max 90  Receive   set alarm pressure max 90 ok    alarm sample flow min  alarm sample flow max  These commands report the sample  or bypass  if installed  flow alarm  minimum and maximum value current settings  The example below reports  that the sample flow alarm minimum value is 0 300 LPM     Send   alarm sample flow min  Receive   alarm sample flow min 0 3 l min    set alarm sample flow min value  set alarm sample flow max value  These commands set the sample  or bypass  if installed  flow alarm  minimum and maximum values to value  where value is a floating point  number representing sample flow alarm limits in liters per minute  The  example below sets the sample flow alarm maximum value to 1 000 LPM     Send   set alarm sample flow max 1  Receive   set alarm sample flow max 1 ok    alarm trig conc no  alarm trig conc no2  alarm trig conc nox  These commands report the NO  NO2  and NOx concentrations alarm  trigger action for minimum alarm  current setting  to either floor or ceiling   The example below shows the NO concentration minimum alarm trigger to  ceiling  according to Table B 3     Send   alarm trig conc no  Receive   alarm trig conc no 1    set alarm trig conc no value  set alarm trig conc no2 value  set alarm trig conc nox value    C Link Protocol Commands  Diagnostics    B 16  M
68.  item   accept set save a change  and or toggle on off functions     Operation  Software Overview    3 4  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Soft Keys  The Soft Keys are multi functional keys that use part of the display to  identify their function at any moment  The function of the soft keys allow  immediate access to the menu structure and most often used menus and  screens  They are located directly underneath the display and as the keys   functions change this is indicated by user defined labels in the lower part of  the display  so that the user knows what the keys are to be used for     To change a soft key  place the menu cursor     gt     on the item of the selected  menu or screen you wish to set  Press  followed by the selected soft key  within 1 second of pressing the right arrow key  The edit soft key prompt  will be displayed for configuration for the new label     Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys  If a particular menu  or screen item cannot be assigned  the key assignment screen will not come  up upon entering right arrow soft key combinations  All items under the  Service menu  including the menu itself  cannot be assigned soft keys     Software Overview  The Model 42i High Level utilizes the menu driven software illustrated by  the flowchart in Figure 3 3  The Power Up screen  shown at the top of the  flowchart  is displayed each time the instrument is turned on  This screen is  displayed while the instrume
69.  last  line in the BMP     sc  screen  This command is meant for backward compatibility on the C series  Screen  information is reported using the    iScreen    command above     Send   screen  Receive   screen This is an I series Instrument  Screen Information  not available    Void unpackDisplay   void far  tdib  unsigned char far  rlescreen       int i j k   unsigned char far  sc4bpp   sc2bpp   screen   ptr   ptr   screen    unsigned char far   malloc 19200      RLE decode the screen  for  i 0  i lt 19200  amp  amp   ptr   screen   lt  19200  i          ptr        rlescreen   i    if    rlescreen   i     0      unsigned char rlecount     unsigned char    rlescreen     i    while  rlecount        ptr      0   rlecount           else if    rlescreen   i     0xff      unsigned char rlecount     unsigned char    rlescreen     i    while  rlecount        ptr      0xff   rlecount                C Link Protocol Commands  Measurement Configuration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 29    Measurement  Configuration    range no  range no2  range nox  high range no  high range no2  high range nox  low range no  low range no2  low range nox  These commands report the NO  NO2  and NOx ranges in single range  mode  or the high and low ranges in dual or auto range mode  according to  Table B 6  If the mode is incorrect  the instrument responds with    can   t   wrong settings     The example below reports that the NO range is 20 ppm     Send   range n
70.  marking used on  the instrument and in the associated documentation     Where to Get Help  Service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide  Contact one of  the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or  visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi     1 866 282 0430 Toll Free    1 508 520 0430 International    Symbol  Description    Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to  electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Directive  2002 96 EC  WEEE  and the equipment that has been put on the market  after 13 August 2005     Thermo Fisher Scientific  42i High Level Instruction Manual  1 1    Chapter 1 Introduction    The Model 42i High Level Chemiluminescence NO NO2 NOx Analyzer  combines proven detection technology  easy to use menu driven software   and advanced diagnostics to offer unsurpassed flexibility and reliability  The  Model 42i High Level has the following features          320 x 240 graphics display         Menu driven software         Field programmable ranges         User selectable single dual auto range modes         Multiple user defined analog outputs         Analog input options         High sensitivity         Fast response time         Linearity through all ranges         Independent NO NO2 NOx ranges         Replaceable NO2 converter cartridge         User selectable digital input output capabilities         Standard communications features include RS232 485 and Ethernet         C Link  MOD
71.  off  B 32    program no  Reports analyzer program number  B 39    push  Simulates pressing a key on the front panel  B 27    range mode  Reports sets current range mode  B 30    range no  Reports sets current NO range  B 29    range no2  Reports sets current NO2 range  B 29    range nox  Reports sets current NOx range  B 29    react temp  Reports current reaction chamber temperature  B 11    relay stat  Reports sets relay logic status to for the designated relay s   B 43    ri  right   Simulates pressing right pushbutton  B 27    ru  run   Simulates pressing run pushbutton  B 27    sample  Sets zero span valves to sample mode  B 31    save  Stores parameters in FLASH  B 35    save params  Stores parameters in FLASH  B 35    sc  screen   C series legacy command that reports a generic response  Use  iscreen instead   B 28    sp field  Reports sets item number and name in scratch pad list  B 22    span  Sets zero span valves to span mode  B 31    sr  Reports last short record stored  B 18    srec  Reports maximum number of short records  B 18    srec format  Reports sets output format for short records  ASCII or binary   B 20    srec layout  Reports current layout of short record data  B 20    srec mem size  Reports maximum number of short records  B 21    srec per  Reports sets short record logging period  B 21    stream per  Reports sets current set time interval for streaming data  B 23    stream time  Reports sets a time stamp to streaming data or not  B 23    temp comp  Re
72.  optional alarm information  indicated by a  commercial at sign     with a source indicator and a starting bit indicator   All alarm information is presumed to be two bits long  low and high   The  bitfield extraction is performed on the integer part of the source  Typical  alarm information would appear as   6 4      C Link Protocol Commands  Record Layout Definition    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 47    Translation Table  Then  there appears an optional translation table within braces       This is a  string of words separated by spaces  An example translation table would be    Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3    The value  once extracted is used as a  zero based index into the translation table to determine the string to display     Selection Table  Then there appears an optional selection table within parentheses           This is a string of numbers separated by spaces   0 1    The selection table  lists the translation table entries which the user may select from when  setting the parameter  This is not necessarily the same as the entries which  may be displayed     Button Designator  Then there appears an optional button designator  This will be one of  B     I    L    T   or  N      B  Indicates a button which pops up an input dialog prompting the user  for a new value using the designated input format  The input format is  specified from the  B  through the subsequent semicolon     I   Indicates a button which pops up a selection li
73.  previous steps in reverse     Figure 7 18  Replacing the I O Expansion Board  Optional     Figure 7 19  Rear Panel Board Connectors    Digital Output Board  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board   Figure 7 18      I O Expansion Board  Opt     Digital Output Board    Motherboard    Mounting Studs    Motherboard Support Bracket    Motherboard    Digital Output Board    I O Expansion Board    Servicing  Motherboard Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 41    Equipment Required     Digital output board    Nut driver  3 16 inch    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Remove the I O expansion board  optional   if used  See the    I O  Expansion Board Replacement    procedure in this chapter     3  Disconnect the digital output board ribbon cable from the  motherboard     4  Using the nut driver  remove the standoffs securing the board to the rear  panel  Figure 7 19      5  Pop off the digital output board from the mounting studs and remove  the board     6  To install the digital output board  follow previous steps in reverse     Motherboard  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard  Figure 7 18      Equipment Required     Motherboard    Philips screwdriver    Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any i
74.  range mode     High    or    Low    is displayed to indicate the  calibration of the high or low coefficient  The example below shows the  coefficient screen in single mode     Note The concentration value will show ERROR if the measured  concentration is not a valid span value  either higher than the selected range   or 0 or lower           In the Main Menu  choose Calibration Factors  gt  NO  NO2 or NOx  Coef          Use  and  to increment or decrement the coefficient value     NO BACKGROUND   NO  0 44  SET BKG TO  0 0    INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Calibration Factors Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 21         Press  to save the new coefficient     Calibration Pressure  The Calibration Pressure screen reports the reactor pressure at which  current calibration was performed  The screen also allows this value to be  edited by the operator  This value should not be changed unless a complete  manual calibration is being performed  The calibration pressure is set equal  to the reactor pressure at the time of calibration     Note Turning the pressure compensation on and off can produce significant  artificial jumps in the apparent sample concentration  If the pressure  compensation feature is to be used  the instrument must be calibrated with  the pressure compensation feature on  For more information about  calibration  see Chapter 4     Calibration             In the Main Menu  choose Calibration F
75.  safety precaution  the microprocessor can override  the user specified ozonator setting  This occurs only if the ozonator flow  doesn   t indicate any flow or if the NO2 converter temperature is below the  minimum alarm limit  In this case  an alarm is activated and the ozonator is  turned off  This is done to prevent the ozonator from overheating  which  will result in permanent damage to the ozonator  or if the converter  temperature drops below the minimum limit  which reduces the  effectiveness of the ozone destruct     It is possible  however  to defeat this feature  by setting the ozonator safety     OFF    in the    Service Menu        Note The ozonator must be    ON    to obtain NO  NO2  and NOx readings   As an additional safety precaution  a lit LED mounted on the measurement  interface board indicates that the ozonator is on          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Ozonator          Press  to toggle and set the ozonator on or off     INSTRUMENT CONTROLS    gt OZONATOR  PMT SUPPLY  AUTO MANUAL MODE  DATALOGGING SETTINGS  COMMUNICATION SETTINGS  I O CONFIGURATION  TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    PRESSURE COMPENSATION  SCREEN CONTRAST  SERVICE MODE  DATE TIME    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 30  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    PMT Supply  The PMT Supply screen is used to turn the PMT power supply on or off   This is useful in a troubleshooting situation          In the Main Menu  c
76.  see if line voltage  is within specifications     Molybdenum consumed  Replace Molybdenum  converter cartridge     Table 6 2  Troubleshooting   Alarm Messages    Alarm Message  Possible Cause  Action    Alarm   Cooler Temp  High  Check fan operation  Replace defective fan     Check fan filter  Clean or replace foam filter     Cooler reads 80   C  Bad unit  Replace cooler     Cooler does not hold set point of  3    C  Replace cooler      thermoelectric module  inside cooler failed     Table 6 1  Troubleshooting   General Guide  continued    Malfunction  Possible Cause  Action    Troubleshooting  Troubleshooting Guides    6 4  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Cooler reads  20   C  Replace cooler      thermocouple bad     Alarm   Internal Temp  Check fan operation  Replace fan if not operating  properly     Check fan filter  Clean or replace foam filter   refer to    Preventive  Maintenance    chapter in  this manual     Alarm   Chamber Temp  Chamber temperature below set  point of 50   C  Check 10K thermistor   replace if bad     Check temperature control  board to insure the LEDs are  coming on  If not   temperature control board  could be defective     Alarm   Conv  Temp  Converter temperature low  Molybdenum converter  should be hot to the touch  if  not the heater may have  failed  Check that converter  temp  set point is  approximately 325   C  Check  that voltage to the heater is  115 VAC     Alarm   Pressure  High pressure indication 
77.  select a reaction  chamber having a different VRC and re compute FD and FO     Adjusting Instrument Gain  Use the following procedure to adjust the instrument gain     Note The NO channel should be calibrated first and then calibrate the NOx  channel     For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in  these procedures  see the    Operation    chapter     1  Determine the GPT flow conditions required to meet the dynamic  parameter specifications as indicated in    Dynamic Parameter  Specifications for Gas Phase Titrator    earlier in this chapter     2  Adjust the GPT diluent air and O3 generator air flows to obtain the  flows determined in    Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas Phase  Titrator    earlier in this chapter  The total GPT airflow must exceed the  total demand of the analyzer  The Model 42i High Level requires  approximately 700 cc min of sample flow  and a total GPT airflow of at  least 1 5 liters min is recommended     a   Allow the analyzer to sample zero air until the NO  NOx and NO2  responses stabilize     b  After the responses have stabilized  from the Main Menu  choose  Calibration  gt  Cal NO Background     c   Press  to set the NO reading to zero     F     F  V     t  NO  O    RC  R    F     F     F     F  NO  O  T  D    Calibration  Calibration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  4 7    d  Press  to return to the Calibration menu and repeat this  procedure to set the NOx background to ze
78.  should this  grounding system be defeated     CAUTION  If the LCD panel breaks  do not to let the liquid crystal  contact your skin or clothes  If the liquid crystal contacts  your skin or clothes  wash it off immediately using soap  and water     Avoid contact with converter heated components  Allow  converter to cool to room temperature before handling  converter components     Equipment Damage  Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or  other external fittings     Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded  antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any  internal component     Handle all printed circuit boards by the edges only     Do not point the photomultiplier tube at a light source   This can permanently damage the tube     Do not remove the panel or frame from the LCD module     The LCD module polarizing plate is very fragile  handle it  carefully     Do not wipe the LCD module polarizing plate with a dry  cloth  it may easily scratch the plate     Do not use alcohol  acetone  MEK or other Ketone based  or aromatic solvents to clean the module  use a soft  cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent     Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or  corrosive gases     Do not shake or jolt the LCD module     Preface  Where to Get Help    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  xviii    WEEE Symbol  The following symbol and description identify the WEEE
79.  the URL of the low NO2 range  The decrease must not exceed  90  of the low NO concentration determined in the    Calibrate Low  NOx    procedure     2  From the Main Menu choose Calibration  gt  Cal Lo NO2 Coefficient     The Lo NO2 field displays the current NO2 concentration  The Lo  Span Conc field is where you enter the Lo NO2 calibration gas  concentration     3  Set the low NO2 calibration gas concentration to reflect the sum of the  NO2 concentration generated by GPT and any NO2 impurity     Use  to move the cursor left and right and use  to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor     4  Press  to calculate and save the new low NO2 coefficient based on  the entered span concentration     Calibrate High NO  Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO channel to the NO  calibration gas     1  Connect a source of high NO calibration gas of about 80  of the high  NO full scale range  Allow the analyzer to sample the high NO  calibration gas until the NO  NO2  and NOx readings have stabilized     Calibration  Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  4 15    2  After the responses have stabilized  from the Main Menu  choose  Calibration  gt  Cal Hi NO Coefficient     The Hi NO field displays the current NO concentration  The Hi Span  Conc field is where you enter the high NO calibration gas  concentration     Use  to move the cursor left and right and use  to increment and dec
80.  the input and output  communication functions and components     Hardware  Hardware components  Figure 8 1  include          NO2 to NO converter         Mode solenoid         Reaction chamber         Optical filter         Pressure transducer         Ozonator         Ozone flow switch         Photomultiplier tube         Photomultiplier tube cooler         Pump    System Description  NO2 to NO Converter    8 2  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific         Sample capillary         Dry air capillary    Figure 8 1  Hardware Components    NO2 to NO Converter  The NO2 to NO converter heats stainless steel to 625   C in order to  convert and detect NO2  The converter consists of an insulated housing   heater  replaceable cartridge  and a type K thermocouple sensor     Mode Solenoid  The mode solenoid valve switches analyzer operation between the NO  mode and NOx mode  It routes the ambient air sample either through the  reaction chamber  NO mode  or through the NO2 to NO converter and  then to the reaction chamber  NOx mode      Reaction Chamber  The reaction chamber is where the sample reacts with ozone and produces  excited NO2 that gives off a photon of energy when it decays     Power Supply    HVPS    Thermistor    PMT Assembly    Reaction  Chamber    I O Expansion    Digital Output Board  Motherboard    Converter    Solenoid    Flow  Switch    Ozonator  Ozonator  Transformer    Pressure Transducer    Input Board    Board  Optional     Measurement 
81.  the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes  wash it off  immediately using soap and water     Operation  Pushbuttons    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 3    Pushbuttons  The Pushbuttons allow the user to traverse the various screens menus     Figure 3 2  Front Panel Pushbuttons    Table 3 1  Front Panel Pushbuttons      Soft Keys  The  soft keys are used to provide shortcuts that  allow the user to jump to user selectable menu screens  For  more information on processing soft keys  see    Soft Keys     below       Run  The  is used to display the Run screen  The Run  screen normally displays the NO  NO2  and NOx  concentrations       Menu  The  is used to display the Main Menu when in the  Run screen  or back up one level in the menu system  For  more information about the Main Menu  see    Main Menu     later in this chapter       Help  The  is context sensitive  that is  it provides  additional information about the screen that is being  displayed  Press  for a brief explanation about the  current screen or menu  Help messages are displayed using  lower case letters to easily distinguish them from the  operating screens  To exit a help screen  press  or  to return to the previous screen  or  to  return to the Run screen       Up  Down      Left  Right    The four arrow pushbuttons             and    move the cursor up  down  left  and right or  change values and states in specific screens       Enter  The  is used to select a menu
82.  the zero  calibration          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Flow Calibration  gt  Zero          Press  to save the current flow reading as the zero reading     Calibrate Flow Span  The Calibrate Flow Span screen allows the user to view and set the flow  sensor calibrate span point     WARNING This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument  service technician     FLOW SENSOR CAL    gt ZERO 200  SPAN 1 0000  SET DEFAULTS    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CALIBRATE FLOW ZERO   CURRENTLY  0 004 LPM  SET TO  0 000 LPM    DISCONNECT PUMP AND  SAVE ZERO PRESSURE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    3 88  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Note An independent flow sensor is required to read the flow  then the  operator enters the flow value on this screen to perform the calibration          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Flow Calibration  gt  Span          Use        and  to move and change the value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     Restore Default Flow Calibration  The Restore Default Flow Calibration screen allows the user to reset the  flow calibration configuration values to factory defaults          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Flow Calibration  gt  Set Defaults          Press  to warn user and enable restore with            Use  to overwrite pressure sensor calibration parameters with  factory default values when pressed after       CALIBRATE FLOW SPAN   CURRENTLY  1 000 LPM
83.  third party supplier  to the extent such assignment is allowed by such  original manufacturer or third party supplier     In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs  replacements or  corrections required  in whole or in part  as the result of  i  normal wear and  tear   ii  accident  disaster or event of force majeure   iii  misuse  fault or  negligence of or by Buyer   iv  use of the Products in a manner for which  they were not designed   v  causes external to the Products such as  but not    Warranty    A 2  42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    limited to  power failure or electrical power surges   vi  improper storage  and handling of the Products or  vii  use of the Products in combination  with equipment or software not supplied by Seller  If Seller determines that  Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by  the warranty hereunder  Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of  investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time  and materials rates  If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts  that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty  Buyer shall  pay Seller therefor at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates  ANY  INSTALLATION  MAINTENANCE  REPAIR  SERVICE   RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF  OR OTHER  TAMPERING WITH  THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY  PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT  SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN 
84.  using    set sp field index     The  example below reports the list of analog output  index numbers  and  variables     Send   list var aout  Receive   list var aout  index variable  0 none  1 no  2 no2  3 nox  18 intt  19 rctt  20 pmtt  21 convt  25 pres  26 smplf  27 pmtv  28 ain1  29 ain2  30 ain3  31 ain4  32 ain5  33 ain6  34 ain7  35 ain8    relay stat  This command reports the current relay logic normally    open    or normally     closed     if all the relays are set to same state  that is all open or all closed   The example below shows that the status when all the relays logic is set to  normally    open        Send   relay stat  Receive   relay stat open    10  Current Output  Not Assigned  Low NO  Range Status    11  Current Output  Not Assigned  Low NO2  Not Assigned    12  Current Output  Not Assigned  Low NOx  Not Assigned    Table B 11  Default Output Assignment  continued    D to A  Function  Single Range  Dual Range  Autorange    C Link Protocol Commands  Record Layout Definition    B 44  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Note if individual relays have been assigned different logic then the response  would be a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the least significant byte  LSB   being relay no 1     For example     Receive   relay stat 0x0001  indicates relay no 1 is set to normally  open logic  all others are normally closed   Receive   relay stat 0x0005  indicates relay no 1 and 3 are set to be  normally open logic  all oth
85. 0  SET TO  100 0      CHANGE VALUE    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Range Menu    3 16  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Set Custom Ranges  The Set Custom Ranges menu lists three custom ranges  C1  C2  and C3   Custom ranges are user defined ranges  In the ppm mode  any value  between 10 and 5 000 ppm can be specified as a range  In the mg m3 mode   any value between 20 and 7 500 mg m3 can be specified as a range          In the Main Menu  choose Range  gt  Set Custom Ranges     Custom Ranges  The Custom Ranges screen is used to define the custom ranges     The display shows the current custom range  The next line of the display is  used to set the range  To use the custom full scale range  be sure to select it   Custom range 1  2  or 3  in the NO  NO2  or NOx Range screen  For more  information about selecting ranges  see    NO  NO2  and NOx Ranges     above          In the Main Menu  choose Range  gt  Set Custom Ranges  gt  Custom  range 1  2  or 3          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save the new range     CUSTOM RANGES    gt CUSTOM RANGE 1 55 6  CUSTOM RANGE 2 75 0  CUSTOM RANGE 3 125 0    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CUSTOM RANGE 1   CURRENTLY  55 6  SET TO  000055 7      MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Averaging Time    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 17    Averaging Time  The averaging time defines 
86. 1    MSB  LSB    Operating status     Service Mode  On   0  0  0  0  0  0  0  1    Maintenance  Local   0  0  0  0  0  0  1  0    Zero gas  On   0  0  0  0  0  1  0  0    Span gas  On   0  0  0  0  1  0  0  0    Gas Unit Indication  ppm OR ppb   0  0  0  1  0  0  0  0    Ozonator  Off   0  0  1  0  0  0  0  0    PMT  Off   0  1  0  0  0  0  0  0    Not used  1  0  0  0  0  0  0  0     Table D   2  Error Status for Model 42i High Level    D7  D6  D5  D4  D3  D2  D1  D0    Bit  8  7  6  5  4  3  2  1    Hex value  80  40  20  10  08  04  02  01    MSB  LSB    Error status     Not Used  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  1    Not Used  0  0  0  0  0  0  1  0    Not Used  0  0  0  0  0  1  0  0    Any Temperature Alarm  0  0  0  0  1  0  0  0    Pressure Alarm  0  0  0  1  0  0  0  0    Sample Flow Alarm  0  0  1  0  0  0  0  0    Ozonator Flow Alarm  0  1  0  0  0  0  0  0    Not used  1  0  0  0  0  0  0  0     Operating and Error  Status    
87. 1 Byte  0x05    Output Address  2 Bytes  0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument    Output Value  2 Bytes  0x0000 or 0xFF00    Response    Function code  1 Byte  0x05    Output Address  2 Bytes  0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument    Output Value  2 Bytes  0x0000 or 0xFF00    Error Response    Function code  1 Byte  Function code   0x80    Exception code  1 Byte  01 Illegal Function  02 Illegal Address     03 Illegal Data  04 Slave Device Failure    Request    Field Name   Hex     Function  05    Output Address Hi  00    Output Address Lo  05    Output Value Hi  FF    Output Value Lo  00    MODBUS Protocol  MODBUS Commands Supported    C 8  42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    MODBUS Commands  Supported    Table C 1 through Table C 3 list the MODBUS commands supported for  the Model 42i High Level     Response    Field Name   Hex     Function  05    Output Address Hi  00    Output Address Lo  05    Output Value Hi  FF    Output Value Lo  00    Table C 1  Read Coils for 42i High Level    Coil Number  Status    1  AUTORANGE  NOx     2  LOCAL REMOTE    3  SERVICE    4  UNITS    5  ZERO MODE    6  SPAN MODE    7  NO MODE    8  NOx MODE    9  NOT USED    10  NOT USED    11  GEN ALARM    12  NO CONC MAX ALARM    13  NO CONC MIN ALARM    14  NO2 CONC MAX ALARM    15  NO2 CONC MIN ALARM    16  NOx CONC MAX ALARM    17  NOx CONC MIN ALARM    18  INT TEMP ALARM    19  CHAMB TEMP ALARM    20  COOLER TEMP ALARM    21  NO2 CONVERTER TEMP ALARM    22  NOT USED
88. 2  1  Relay 1 Contact a    2  Relay 2 Contact a    3  Relay 3 Contact a    4  Relay 4 Contact a    5  Relay 5 Contact a    6  Relay 6 Contact a    7  Relay 7 Contact a    8  Relay 8 Contact a    9  Relay 9 Contact a    10  Relay 10 Contact a    11  NC    12  Solenoid Drive Output 1    13  Solenoid Drive Output 2    14  Solenoid Drive Output 3    Table 6 6  I O Expansion Board  Optional  Connector Pin Descriptions  continued    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal  Description    Troubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    6 20  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    15  Solenoid Drive Output 4    16  Solenoid Drive Output 5    17  Solenoid Drive Output 6    18  Solenoid Drive Output 7    19  Solenoid Drive Output 8    20  Relay 1 Contact b    21  Relay 2 Contact b    22  Relay 3 Contact b    23  Relay 4 Contact b    24  Relay 5 Contact b    25  Relay 6 Contact b    26  Relay 7 Contact b    27  Relay 8 Contact b    28  Relay 9 Contact b    29  Relay 10 Contact b    30   24V    31   24V    32   24V    33   24V    34   24V    35   24V    36   24V    37   24V    Table 6 8  Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal  Description    PMT IN  J1  1  PMT Input    2  Ground    INTF BD  J2  1   15V    2  Ground    3   15V    Table 6 7  Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions  continued    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal  Description    Troubleshoo
89. 28 V  ANALOG IN 3 0 00 V  ANALOG IN 4 0 00 V  ANALOG IN 5 0 00 V  ANALOG IN 6 0 00 V  ANALOG IN 7 0 00 V    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Diagnostics Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 69    Digital Inputs  The Digital Inputs screen  read only  displays the state of the 16 digital  inputs          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Digital Inputs     Relay States  The Relay States screen displays the state of the 10 digital outputs and  allows toggling of the state to either on  1  or off  0   The relays are restored  to their original states upon exiting this screen          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Relay States     Test Analog Outputs  The Test Analog Outputs menu contains a number of digital to analog  converter  DAC  calibration items  Channel choices include all analog  outputs  6 voltage channels  and 6 current channels  if the I O expansion  board option is installed           In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Test Analog Outputs     DIGITAL INPUTS    gt INPUT 1 1  INPUT 2 1  INPUT 3 1  INPUT 4 1  INPUT 5 1  INPUT 6 1  INPUT 7 1    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    RELAY STATE    gt OUTPUT 1 0  OUTPUT 2 0  OUTPUT 3 0  OUTPUT 4 1  OUTPUT 5 0  OUTPUT 6 0  OUTPUT 7 0    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Diagnostics Menu    3 70  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Set Analog Outputs  The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices  Set to full scale  set  to zero
90. 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 21    5  Loosen the four captive screws holding converter housing to floor plate     Figure 7 10  NO2 to NO Stainless Steel Converter Assembly    6  Remove the six screws holding the top housing assembly to the bottom  half     7  Remove the converter cartridge heater assembly from the bottom  housing assembly     8  Loosen the heater clamp  pry heater apart no wider than necessary and  remove the converter cartridge noting the proper orientation of heater  wires and thermocouple probe     9  To replace converter  follow previous steps in reverse  Be sure to wrap  the O3 converter tube snugly around the heater     Stainless Steel    O3 Converter    Bottom Housing    Top Housing Assembly    Heater Assembly    Captive Screws  4     Thermocouple Leads  and Heater Connector    Converter Assembly    Assembly    Servicing  Solenoid Valve Replacement    7 22  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Solenoid Valve  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the solenoid valve  Figure 7 11      Equipment Required     Solenoid valve    Wrench  5 16 inch    Philips screwdriver    1  Refer to    Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the  Partition Panel    in this chapter to lower the partition panel  then  proceed to the next step below     2  Disconnect solenoid from the Measurement Interface board  NO NOX  connector   Note electrical connections to facilitate re connection     3  Remove plumbing from sole
91. ALOG IN 4    40063 amp 40064  ANALOG IN 5    40065 amp 40066  ANALOG IN 6    40067 amp 40068  ANALOG IN 7    40069 amp 40070  ANALOG IN 8    Table C 3  Write Coils for 42i High Level    Coil Number  Action Triggered    101  ZERO MODE    102  SPAN MODE    103  NO MODE    104  NOx MODE    105  NOT USED    106  NOT USED    107  SET BACKGROUND    108  CAL TO LO SPAN    109  AOUTS TO ZERO    110  AOUTS TO FS    111  CAL TO HI SPAN    Table C 2  Read Registers for 42i High Level  continued    Register Number  Variable     Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual D 1    Appendix D  Geysitech  Bayern Hessen  Protocol    This appendix provides a description of the Geysitech  Bayern Hessen or  BH  Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as  TCP IP over Ethernet     The Geysitech Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in  this document  The Geysitech protocol support for the iSeries enables the  user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and to  trigger the instrument to be in sample zero span mode if valid for that  instrument  This is achieved by using the supported Geysitech commands  listed below     For details of the Model 42i High Level Geysitech Protocol specification   see the following topics             Serial Communication Parameters    on page D 1            TCP Communication Parameters    on page D 2            Instrument Address    on page D 2          Abbreviations Used    on page D
92. ALUE  CHOOSE SIGNAL TO OUTPUT    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    SELECT OUTPUT RANGE   SELECTED OUTPUT  V ALL  CURRENTLY  0 10V  SET TO  0 5V    CHANGE VALUE  SAVE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 55    Minimum and Maximum Value  The MinimumValue screen is used to edit the zero  0  to full scale  100   value in percentages for the selected analog output channel  See Table 3 6  for a list of choices  The minimum and maximum output value screens  function the same way  The example below shows the set minimum value  screen          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  IO Configuration  gt   Analog Output Config  gt  Select Channel  gt  Set Minimum or Maximum  Value          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to validate and save the new minimum value     Table 3 6  Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Table    Output  Zero   Value  Full Scale 100  Value    NO  Zero  0   Range Setting    NO2  Zero  0   Range Setting    NOx  Zero  0   Range Setting    LO NO  Zero  0   Range Setting    LO NO2  Zero  0   Range Setting    LO NOx  Zero  0   Range Setting    HI NO  Zero  0   Range Setting    HI NO2  Zero  0   Range Setting    HI NOx  Zero  0   Range Setting    Range  NOx   Recommend not to change the setting for this output    Internal Temp  User set alarm min value  User set alarm max value    Chamber Temp  User set alarm min value  User set alarm m
93. ANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Alarms Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 79    displayed  indicating that the flow is acceptable  Inadequate ozonator flow  will cause the ozonator to overheat  resulting in permanent damage to the  ozonator          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Ozonator Flow     Zero and Span Check  The Zero Span Check screen allows the user to view the status of the most  recent zero check and set the maximum zero check offset  The zero and  span check screens are displayed if the zero span check option is enabled  and function the same way          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Zero or Span Check     Max Zero and Span Offset  The Max Zero Check Offset screen is used to change the maximum zero  check offset  The maximum zero and span offset screens function the same  way          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Zero or Span Check  gt  Max Offset          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     OZONATOR FLOW   ACTUAL  gt  0 050 LPM    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ZERO CHECK   ALARM  OK  RESPONSE  0 00   gt MAX OFFSET  10 00    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Alarms Menu    3 80  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Zero and Span Auto  Calibration  The Zero Auto Calibration screen  read only  allow the user to view the  status of the most recent auto background calibration  The zero and span  au
94. APPROVAL  OR ANY USE OF  REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER  SHALL  IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH  RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS     THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY  STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT  SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A  DEFECTIVE PRODUCT  EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN  THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT  SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER  WARRANTIES  WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  ORAL OR  WRITTEN  WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS  INCLUDING  WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR  PURPOSE  SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE  PRODUCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY  PARTICULAR RESULT     Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 1    Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands    This appendix provides a description of the C Link protocol commands  that can be used to remotely control a Model 42i High Level analyzer using  a host device such as a PC or a datalogger  C Link protocol may be used  over RS 232  RS 485  or Ethernet  C Link functions can be accessed over  Ethernet using TCP IP port 9880             Instrument Identification Number    on page B 2 describes the C Link  command format             Commands    on page B 2 lists all the 42i High Level C Link  commands in Table B 1             Measurements    on page B 9 describes and gives examples of the  measurement commands             Alarms    on page B 12 describes and gives e
95. BUS  and streaming data protocols    For details of the analyzer   s principle of operation and product  specifications  see the following topics             Principle of Operation    on page 1 2 describes the principles by which  your analyzer operates     Introduction  Principle of Operation    1 2  42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific            Specifications    on page 1 3 is a list of the analyzer   s performance  specifications     Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this chemiluminescence  NO NO2 NOx analyzer  We are committed to the manufacture of  instruments exhibiting high standards of quality  performance  and  workmanship  Service personnel are available for assistance with any  questions or problems that may arise in the use of this analyzer  For more  information on servicing  see Chapter 7     Servicing        Principle of Operation  The Model 42i High Level operates on the principle that nitric oxide  NO   and ozone  O3  react to produce a characteristic luminescence with an  intensity linearly proportional to the NO concentration  Infrared light  emission results when electronically excited NO2 molecules decay to lower  energy states  Specifically     Nitrogen dioxide  NO2  must first be transformed into NO before it can be  measured using the chemiluminescent reaction  NO2 is converted to NO by  a stainless steel NO2 to NO converter heated to about 625   C  the optional  molybdenum converter is heated to 325   C      The am
96. CAL NO BACKGROUND  CAL NOx BACKGROUND  CAL NOx BACKGROUND  CAL NO COEFFICIENT  CAL HI NO COEFFICIENT  CAL NO2 COEFFICIENT  CAL HI NO2 COEFFICIENT  CAL NOx COEFFICIENT  CAL HI NOx COEFFICIENT  CALIBRATE PRESSURE  CAL LO NO COEFFICIENT  ZERO SPAN CHECK  CAL LO NO2 COEFFICIENT    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CAL LO NOx COEFFICIENT  CALIBRATE PRESSURE    NO BACKGROUND   NO  1 2  CURRENTLY  0 0      SET NO TO ZERO    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Calibration Menu    3 24  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Calibrate NO  NO2  and  NOx Coefficients  The Calibrate NO Coefficient screen is used to adjust the NO span  concentrations while sampling span gas of known concentration  All  calibration screens operate the same way  Therefore  the following  description of the NO calibration screen applies to the NO2 and NOx  calibration screens as well     The display shows the current NO concentration reading and the current  NO range  The next line of the display is where the NO calibration gas  concentration is entered     It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating  The longer the  averaging time  the more precise the calibration will be  For the most precise  calibration  use the 300 second averaging time  For more information about  calibration  see Chapter 4     Calibration             In the Main Menu  choose Calibration  gt  Cal NO  NO2  or NOx  Coefficents          Use  and  pushbuttons to move the cursor le
97. Calibration  Calibration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  4 5    The O3 generator  ozonator  airflow rate and the NO flow rate must be  adjusted such that the following relationships hold     Determining GPT System Flow  Conditions  Use the following procedure to determine the flow conditions to be used in  the GPT system     1  Determine FT  the total flow required at the output manifold  which  should be equal to the analyzer demand plus 10 to 50 percent excess     2  Establish  NO OUT as the highest NO concentration that will be  required at the output manifold   NO OUT should be about equal to  90  of the upper range limit  URL  of the NO2 concentration range to  be covered     3  Determine FNO as     4  Select a convenient or available reaction chamber volume  Initially a  trial volume may be selected in the range of 200 to 500 cc     5  Compute FO as     min     ppm  2 75  t  x      NO     P  R  RC  R       F     F     F      NO         NO  NO  O    NO  STD  RC    min  2   lt   F     F  V     t  NO  O    RC  R        NO  F  x      NO     F  STD    T  OUT  NO    F     2 75  V  x  F  x      NO     F  NO  RC  NO  STD  O    Calibration  Calibration    4 6  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    6  Compute tR as     7  Verify that tR  lt  2 minutes  If not  select a reaction chamber with a  smaller VRC     8  Compute the diluent air flow rate as     9  If FO turns out to be impractical for the desired system 
98. Description    101346 00  Temperature Control    101355 00  Signal Input    101688 00  Ambient Temperature    101695 00  Permeator Oven    101050 00  Heater Power    101036 00  DC Power Supply 24V Output    101037 00  115VAC Supply to Interface Board    101048 00  RS 485 Data    101038 00  Power Switch to Motherboard    101364 00  DC Power Supply Status Monitor    101055 00  Main AC Receptacle Assembly    101054 00  Motherboard to Front Panel Board    101035 00  DC Power Supply AC Input    101033 00  AC from Outlet    101377 00  AC to Power Switch    102057 00  AC to External Pump    101267 00  Fan Power Cable    Servicing  Cable List    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 7    Figure 7 2  Component Layout    Power Supply    HVPS    Thermistor    PMT Assembly    Reaction  Chamber    I O Expansion    Digital Output Board  Motherboard    Converter    Solenoid    Flow  Switch    Ozonator  Ozonator  Transformer    Pressure Transducer    Input Board    Board  Optional     Measurement  Interface Board    Capillaries  2     Servicing  Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel    7 8  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Removing the  Measurement Bench  and Lowering the  Partition Panel    The measurement bench can be removed and the partition panel can be  lowered to improve access to connectors and components  Refer to the  following steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel  s
99. ES  FLOW    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    PMT VOLTS    ANALOG INPUTS    gt NONE  ANALOG IN 1  ANALOG IN 2  ANALOG IN 3  ANALOG IN 4  ANALOG IN 5  ANALOG IN 6    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 46  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific         Press  to leave the warning screen and move to next screen          Use  to confirm and save the new selection change     TCP IP Settings  The TCP IP Settings menu is used for defining TCP IP settings          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  TCP IP Settings     Use DHCP  The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use DHCP or not     Note The instrument power must be cycled after this parameter has been  changed for the change to take effect          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  TCP IP Settings  gt  Use DCHP          Press  to toggle and set DHCP on or off     RS 232 RS 485 SELECTION   RS 232 RS 485 SELECTION     XXXXXX   WARNING   XXXXXXX  CURRENTLY  RS 232    DISCONNECT THE SERIALX X  SET TO  RS 485      CABLES BEFORE CHANGING X  MAKE SURE THAT THE CABLEXX    THE SELECTION XXXXXX  IS OFF  PRESS TO CONFIRM    TO CONTINUE  TOGGLE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    TCP IP SETTINGS    gt USE DHCP OFF  IP ADDRESS 192 168 1 15  NETMASK 255 255 255 0  GATEWAY 192 168 1 1  HOST NAME ISERIES    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo F
100. ETURN TO RUN    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ENTER NEW PASSWORD   ASSSSSSSSS  ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP  OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE  0123456789     SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Password    3 100  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Remove Password  The Remove Password screen is used to erase the current password and  disable password protection  The remove password is shown if the  instrument is unlocked and the password set          In the Main Menu  choose Password  gt  Remove Password          Press  to remove password and returns to main menu     Unlock Instrument  The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the  front panel  The Unlock Instrument is shown if the instrument is locked          In the Main Menu  choose Password  gt  Unlock Instrument          Press  to disable instrument lock and returns to main menu     REMOVE PASSWORD   xxxPRESSING ENTER WILLxxxx  xREMOVE CURRENT PASSWORDxx  xxxAND DISABLE LOCKINGxxxx    REMOVE PASSWORD    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ENTER THE PASSWORD   ASSSSSSSSS  ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP  OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE  0123456789     SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  4 1    Chapter 4 Calibration    This chapter describes procedures for performing a calibration of the Model  42i High Level  The information described here should be adequate to  perform the calibration  However  if greater detail is desired  due to  particular application r
101. GITAL INPUT SETTINGS  ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIG  ANALOG INPUT CONFIG    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 50  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Logic State  The Logic State screen is used to change the I O relay to either normally  open or normally closed          Press  to toggle and set the logic state between open or closed     Instrument State  The Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument state  that is tied to the selected relay output  A submenu lists signal types of either  alarms or non alarm to choose from          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Output Relay Settings  gt  Select Relay  gt  Instrument State     OUTPUT RELAY SETTINGS    gt 1 NOP GEN ALARM  2 NOP NONE  3 NOP UNITS  4 NOP CONC ALARM  5 NOP NONE  6 NOP NONE  7 NOP NO MODE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    OUTPUT RELAY SETUP    gt LOGIC STATE OPEN  INSTRUMENT STATE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CHOOSE SIGNAL TYPE    gt ALARMS  NON ALARM    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 51    Alarms  The Alarms status screen allows the user to select the alarm status for the  selected relay output  The selected item is shown by     lt       after it  Items  displayed are determined by the options installed          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Output Relay Se
102. High Level Instruction Manual  4 11    The recorder response will be as follows     Where     URL   Nominal upper range limit of the NO2 channel  ppm    12  Record the NO2 concentration and the analyzer s NO2 response     13  Maintaining the same FNO  FO  and FD  adjust the ozone generator to  obtain several other concentrations of NO2 over the NO2 range  at least  five evenly spaced points across the remaining scale are suggested      14  Record the stable responses and plot the analyzer s NO2 responses  versus the corresponding calculated  using the above equation for   NO2 OUT  concentrations and draw or calculate the NO2 calibration  curve     Note It is important that the curve should be linear within   1  FS over the  NO2 range  If the curve is nonlinear  the analyzer is not operating correctly   possible leak  or converter failure  etc   and should be serviced  Assuming  the curve is linear  subsequent data should be reduced using this NO2  calibration curve response     Using the Calibration Factors menu can change the calibration factors  This  is often useful in a troubleshooting situation  However  after the above  calibration procedure is completed  all subsequent data reduction depends  on the calibration parameters  remaining the same as during the initial  calibration     Therefore never change any calibration factor without first recording the  value so that after any troubleshooting procedure is completed  the initial  value can be re entered thereby not alte
103. High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Send   set stream time 0  Receive   set stream time 0 ok    Calibration  set cal no coef  set cal no2 coef  set cal nox coef  set cal high no coef  set cal high no2 coef  set cal high nox coef  set cal low no coef  set cal low no2 coef  set cal low nox coef  These commands will auto calibrate the NO  NO2  and NOx coefficients  based on the NO  NO2  and NOx span gas concentrations  The high and  low commands are only available in dual and auto range mode  If the mode  is incorrect  the instrument responds with    can   t  wrong settings     The  example below shows a successful auto calibration of the low NO  coefficient     Send   set cal low no coef  Receive   set cal low no coef ok    set cal no bkg  set cal nox bkg  These commands will auto calibrate the NO and NOx backgrounds  If the  instrument is set to manual NOx mode  the response to    set cal no bkg    will  be    can   t  wrong settings     The example below shows a successful  auto calibration of the NO background     Send   set cal no bkg  Receive   set cal no bkg ok    Table B 5  Stream Time Values    Value  Stream Time    0  Attaches time stamp to streaming data string    1  Disables time stamp to streaming data string    C Link Protocol Commands  Calibration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 25    no coef  no2 coef  nox coef  high no coef  high no2 coef  high nox coef  low no coef  low no2 coef  low nox coef  These
104. IAGS ALARM    DILUTION RATIO   CURRENTLY  001  1  SET TO   002  1      MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 97    Restore User Defaults  The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and  configuration values to factory defaults  The restore user defaults screen is  visible only when the instrument is in service mode  For more information  on the service mode  see    Service Mode    earlier in the chapter     Note When this item is selected  the instrument will be automatically  rebooted after restoring defaults          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Restore User Defaults          Press  to warn and enable restore with            Press  to overwrite all user settings with factory default values     DISPLAY PIXEL TEST   DURING TEST PRESS OR XX  TO EXIT   TO TOGGLEXXXXXX    BEGIN TEST  GO BACK TO MENU  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    RESTORE USER DEFAULTS   RESTORE USER DEFAULTS     RESTORE  RESTORE    ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO x  PRESS  TO CONFIRM RESTORE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Password    3 98  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Password  The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection  If the  instrument is locked  none of the settings may be changed via the front  panel user interface  The items visible under the password menu are  determined
105. In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Select Concentration  gt  Min or  Max          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     Min Trigger  The Minimum Trigger screen allows the user to view and set the NO  NO2   and NOx concentration low alarm trigger type to either floor or ceiling  The  minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger  alarm is triggered  when the concentration falls below the minimum value  or a ceiling trigger   alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value           In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Select Concentration  gt   MinTrigger          Press  to toggle and set to floor or ceiling     NO CONCENTRATION   ACTUAL 62 7   gt MIN 0  MAX 5000  MIN TRIGGER CEILING    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    NO CONCENTRATION   ACTUAL MIN  0  SET MIN TO  00000001      MOVE CURSOR  INC DEC  SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    3 82  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Service Menu  The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the service mode   To put the instrument into service mode          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Service Mode          Press  to toggle and set the service mode on     Advanced diagnostic functions are included in the service mode   Meaningful data should not be collected when the instrument is in the  service mode          In the Main Menu  choose Service     
106. Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Figure 7 1  Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap    Firmware Updates  The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or  over the Ethernet  This includes both the main processor firmware and the  firmware in all low level processors  Refer to the i Port manual for the  firmware update procedure     Replacement Parts  List    Table 7 1 lists the replacement parts for the Model 42i High Level major  subassemblies  Refer to Figure 7 2 to identify the component location     Table 7 1  Model 42i High Level Replacement Parts    Part Number  Description    100480 00  Front Panel Push Button Board    101491 02  Processor Board    100533 00  Motherboard    100539 00  Digital Output Board    100542 00  I O Expansion Board  Optional     100859 00  Front Panel Connector Board    100536 00  Measurement Interface Board    100856 00  Temperature Control Board    101167 00  Input Board Assembly    101076 00  Front Panel Display    9973  Ozonator Assembly    9974  Ozonator Transformer    101023 00  Pressure Transducer    101620 00  Flow Switch  Ozone     9367  Photomultiplier Tube  PMT     Servicing  Replacement Parts List    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 5    101024 00  PMT High Voltage Power Supply    9981  PMT Base Socket Assembly    101390 00  Solenoid Valve    101020 00  Cooler Assembly    102648 02  Reaction Chamber Assembly    101214 00  NO2 to NO Converter Assembl
107. MIN TRIG CEILING FLOOR    ACTUAL TRIGGER  CEILING  SET TRIGGER TO  FLOOR    TOGGLE AND SAVE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    SERVICE    gt PMT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT  RANGE MODE SELECT  CONVERTER SET TEMP  PRESSURE CALIBRATION  FLOW CALIBRATION  INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION  TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ANALOG OUT CALIBRATION  ANALOG INPUT CALIBRATION  OZONATOR SAFETY  DILUTION RATIO  DISPLAY PIXEL TEST  RESTORE USER DEFAULTS    Operation  Service Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 83    PMT Voltage Adjustment  The PMT Voltage Adjustment screen is used to manually adjust the PMT  supply voltage  The PMT voltage adjustment screen is visible only when the  instrument is in service mode  For more information on the service mode   see    Service Mode    earlier in this chapter          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  PMT Voltage Adjustment          Use  and  to increment or decrement the PMT counts          Press  to save the new PMT voltage     Range Mode Select  The Range Mode Select screen is used to switch between the various range  modes  single  dual  and auto range  The range mode select screen is visible  only when the instrument is in service mode  For more information on the  service mode  see    Service Mode    earlier in this chapter          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Range Mode Select          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to save the new range mode     WARNING Th
108. Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Zero Span Ratio  The Zero Span Ratio screen is used to adjust the ratio of zeros to spans  For  example  if this value is set to 1  a span check will follow every zero check  If  this value is set to 3  there will be two zero checks between each zero span  check  This value may be set from 1 to 10  with 1 as default          In the Main Menu  choose Calibration  gt  Zero Span Check  gt  Zero Span  Ratio          Use  and  to increment and decrement the numeric value          Press  to save the ratio value     ZERO SPAN AVERAGING TIME   CURRENTLY  60 SEC  SET TO  90 SEC      CHANGE VALUE    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ZERO SPAN RATIO   CURRENTLY  1  1  SET TO  2  1      CHANGE VALUE    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 29    Instrument Controls  Menu  The Instrument Controls menu contains a number of items  The software  controls listed in this menu enable control of the listed instrument  functions          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls     Ozonator  The Ozonator screen is used to turn the internal ozonator on or off  The  display shows the status of the control line that turns the ozonator on or off   The next line of the display shows the user specified ozonator setting   Under most conditions  the control line status and ozonator set status are  the same  However  as a
109. Refer to    Removing the  Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel    in this chapter     Input Board  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the input board  Figure 7 13      Equipment Required     Input board    Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  Input Board Replacement    7 26  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Philips screwdriver    1  Refer to    Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the  Partition Panel    in this chapter to lower the partition panel  then  proceed to the next step below     2  Disconnect the BNC signal and the ribbon cable     3  Loosen the two screws holding the assembly bracket to the floor plate   move the assembly towards the rear  and lift the assembly off the screws     4  Loosen the two screws holding the input box to the assembly bracket  and lift the input box off the screws     Figure 7 13  Replacing the Input Board    5  Remove the four screws holding the input board to the input box and  remove the input board     6  Install the input board by following the previous steps in reverse     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Assembly Bracket    Input Bo
110. Run  screen     X  CONCENTRATION  W    NO  62 7 PPM    NO2  25 5 PPM    NOx  88 2 PPM    SAMPLE 12 34  ALARMx    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    XXLO WCONCENTRATIONXXLO W  NO 62 7 PPM  NO2 25 5 PPM  NOx 88 2 PPM  SAMPLE 12 34  ALARMx    MAIN MENU    gt RANGE  AVERAGING TIME  CALIBRATION FACTORS  CALIBRATION  INSTRUMENT CONTROLS  DIAGNOSTICS  ALARMS    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    SERVICE  PASSWORD    Operation  Range Menu    3 8  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Range Menu  The Range menu allows the operator to select the gas units  NO NO2 NOx  ranges  and to set the custom ranges  The screens below show the range  menu in single range mode and dual auto range modes  For more  information about the single  dual  and auto range modes  see    Single Range  Mode        Dual Range Mode     and    Auto Range Mode    below          In the Main Menu  choose Range     Single Range Mode  In the single range mode  the NO  NO2  and NOx channels each have one  range  one averaging time  and one span coefficient     By default  the three analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel  connector as shown in Figure 3 4  See Table 3 2 for channels and pin  connections  Single range mode may be selected from the     Single Dual Auto Select    in the    Service Menu     later in this chapter     RANGE   RANGE    gt GAS UNITS PPM   gt GAS UNITS PPM  NO RANGE 50  HI NO RANGE 100  NO2 RANGE 50  LO NO RANGE 50  NOx RANGE 50  HI NO2 RANGE 100  SET CUSTOM RANGES  LO NO2 RANGE
111. S ALARM    PRESSURE   ACTUAL MIN  20 0 mmHg  SET MIN TO  30 0 mmHg     INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Alarms Menu    3 78  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Flow  The Flow screen displays the current bypass flow reading  if the bypass flow  option is installed  and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits   Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 1 LPM  If the sample flow reading  goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit  an alarm is activated   The word    ALARM    appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Flow     Min and Max Flow Limits  The Minimum Flow alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum  sample flow alarm limit  The minimum and maximum sample flow screens  function the same way          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Flow  gt  Min or Max          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     Ozonator Flow  The Ozonator Flow screen  read only  is used to display the ozonator flow  readings  If the ozonator flow reading is 0 050 LPM  50 cc  or below  an  alarm is activated  and an alarm condition screen appears as    LOW     If the  ozonator flow is above 0 050 LPM  the no alarm condition screen is    FLOW   ACTUAL 0 531 LPM   gt MIN 0 350 LPM  MAX 0 900 LPM    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    FLOW   ACTUAL MIN  0 350 LPM  SET MIN TO  0 360 LPM      INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    R
112. SET TO    OF RECS    CHANGE  ACCEPT    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 33    The Record Display screen  read only  displays the selected records          Use  and  to view all the items in the record          Use  and  to view records at different times     Date and Time  The Date and Time screen is used to set a start date and time for which to  view logged data  For example  if    20 JUN 2005 10 00    is entered  then the  first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this time  If  set to one minute logging  this would be at    20 JUN 2005 10 01             Use  and  to increment or decrement the selected field          Use  to advance to next field          Press  to set the date and time of the first record to be displayed  and continue to the record display screen     SET   BACK FROM CURRENT   0000000  TOTAL LRECS  20    MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    time date flags  10 00 06 20 05 FC0088900  11 00 06 20 05 FC0088900  12 00 06 20 05 FC0088900  13 00 06 20 05 FC0088900  PGUP DN  PAN L R    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 34  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    The Record Display screen  read only  displays the selected records          Use  and  to view all the items in the record          Use  and  to view records at different times     Erase Log  The E
113. STX gt DA lt CR gt     Reply String    lt STX gt MD03 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt  2578 01 lt SP gt 03  lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000  lt SP gt 002  lt SP gt                  Address First Concentration E format  25 78 Address 1   5681 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt  1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP                 Second Concentration   5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75  0000000000 lt SP gt  lt CR gt     The attached concentrations are in the selected gas units  The  measurements that are attached to the response if not valid in a particular  mode then a value of 0 0 will be reported     The following measurements reported in response to DA command are for  the Model 42i High Level     The 3 measurements reported in single range mode include          NO         NO2         NOx    The 6 measurements reported in dual or auto range modes include          low NO         low NO2         low NOx         high NO         high NO2         high NOx    Measurements reported in  response to DA command    Single Range Mode    Dual Auto Range Mode    Geysitech  Bayern Hessen  Protocol  Geysitech Commands    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual D 7     See Table D   1 for operating status and Table D   2 for error status for the  Model 42i High Level     Table D   1  Operating Status for Model 42i High Level    D7  D6  D5  D4  D3  D2  D1  D0    Bit  8  7  6  5  4  3  2  1    Hex value  80  40  20  10  08  04  02  0
114. Serial Communication  Parameters  The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure  the serial port of the iSeries to support MODBUS RTU protocol     Number of Data bits    8    Number of Stop bits    1    Parity    None    Data rate    from 1200 115200 Baud  9600 is default     TCP Communication  Parameters  iSeries Instruments support the MODBUS TCP protocol  The register  definition is the same as for the serial interface     TCP connection port for MODBUS   502    Application Data Unit  Definition  Here are the MODBUS ADU  Application Data Unit  formats over serial  and TCP IP     Slave Address  The MODBUS slave address is a single byte in length  This is the same as  the instrument ID used for C Link commands and can be between 1 and  127 decimal  i e  0x01 hex to 0x7F hex   This address is only used for  MODBUS RTU over serial connections     Note Device ID    0    used for broadcast MODBUS commands  is not  supported  Device IDs 128 through 247  i e  0x80 hex to 0xF7 hex  are not  supported because of limitations imposed by C Link     MBAP Header  In MODBUS over TCP IP  a MODBUS Application Protocol Header   MBAP  is used to identify the message  This header consists of the  following components     Serial   Slave Address  Function Code  Data  Error Check    TCP IP   MBAP Header  Function Code  Data    Transaction Identifier  2 Bytes  0x0000 to 0xFFFF  Passed back in response     Protocol Identifier  2 Bytes  0x00  MODBUS protocol     Length  2
115. T    ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO x  PRESS  TO CONFIRM RESETXX    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 39    Logging Period Min  The Logging Period Min screen is used to select the logging period in  minutes for the record format  srec or lrec   List of choices include  off  1  5   15  30  and 60 minutes  default           In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Configure Datalogging  gt  Logging Period Min          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to set the logging period     Memory Allocation Percent  The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of  each record type for both short records and long records  Percentages  between 0 and 100  are available in increments of 10  Changing this value  results in log erasure for both short records and long records          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Configure Datalogging  gt  Memory Allocation            Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to set the percentage for both record types and proceed to  the erasure warning screen     DATALOGGING SETTINGS    gt LOGGING PERIOD MIN OFF  MEMORY ALLOCATION   50  DATA TREATMENT AVG    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    SET PERIOD FOR SREC   CURRENTLY  OFF MIN  SET TO  60 MIN    CHANGE VALUE  SAVE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Oper
116. V TEMP  CHAMBER PRES  FLOW    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    PMT VOLTS  OZONATOR FLOW    ANALOG INPUTS    gt NONE  ANALOG IN 1  ANALOG IN 2  ANALOG IN 3  ANALOG IN 4  ANALOG IN 5  ANALOG IN 6    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 38  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific         Press  to commit changes to selected record format and erase  record log file data          Press  to confirm changes     Reset to Default Content  The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging  field items to default values  For more information about selecting the  analog output signal group choices  see    Select Content    above          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Reset to Default Content          Press  to reset selected record format and erase record log file data          Press  to reset     Configure Datalogging  The Configure Datalogging menu deals with datalogging configuration for  the currently selected record type          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Configure Datalogging     CHANGE LREC FORMAT AND  CHANGE LREC FORMAT AND  ERASE LREC LOG FILE DATA   ERASE LREC LOG FILE DATA     COMMIT  COMMIT    ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO x  PRESS  TO CONFIRM CHANGES    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    RESET LREC FORMAT AND  RESET LREC FORMAT AND  ERASE LREC LOG FILE DATA   ERASE LREC LOG FILE DATA     RESET  RESE
117. VG SEC 60    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ZERO CAL RESET  SPAN CAL RESET OFF  ZERO SPAN RATIO 1    Operation  Calibration Menu    3 26  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Next Time  The Next Time screen is used to view and set the next zero span check date  and time  Once the initial zero span check is performed  the date and time  of the next zero span check is calculated and displayed          In the Main Menu  choose Calibration  gt  Zero Span Check  gt  Next  Time          Use        and  to move and change the value of  the date and time          Press  to accept a change     Period Hours  The Zero Span Period Hours screen defines the period or interval between  zero span checks  Periods between 0 and 999 hours are acceptable  To turn  the zero span check off  set the period to 0          In the Main Menu  choose Calibration  gt  Zero Span Check  gt  Period  Hours          Use  and  to increment and decrement the numeric value          Press  to save the period     NEXT DATE AND TIME   NEXT DATE AND TIME   01 JAN 2005 12 00  02 JAN 2005 12 00    PRESS TO EDIT  SETTING  DAYS  SET MONTHS  CHANGE VALUE    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ZERO SPAN PERIOD   CURRENTLY  024 HRS  SET TO  025 HRS      MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Calibration Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 27    Zero Span Purge Duration  Minutes  The Zero Duration Minu
118. X gt  is abbreviation for Start of Text  ASCII code 0x02      lt ETX gt  is abbreviation for End of Text  ASCII code 0x03      lt SP gt  is abbreviation for space  ASCII code 0x20     The following is the basic structure of a Geysitech command      lt STX gt Command text lt ETX gt  lt BCC gt     OR     lt STX gt Command text lt CR gt     Each Command is framed by control characters   lt STX gt  at the start and  terminated with either  lt ETX gt  or  lt CR gt      If a command is terminated with  lt ETX gt  then additional two characters   lt BCC gt  is attached after  lt ETX gt   this is the block checksum     TCP Communication  Parameters    Instrument Address    Abbreviations Used    Basic Command  Structure    Geysitech  Bayern Hessen  Protocol  Block Checksum  lt BCC gt     Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual D 3     The block checksum is calculated beginning with a seed value of  00000000  binary  0x00   and bitwise exclusive ORing with each of the  characters of the command string  or response  including the framing  characters  lt STX gt  and  lt ETX gt   The checksum works as an error check  The  command terminator determines the presence or absence of  lt BCC gt      If a command is terminated by  lt ETX gt  then the next two characters are the  checksum  if the command is terminated with  lt CR gt  no checksum is  attached    The block checksum is represented by two characters  which represent a 2  digit hex number  1byte    e g  1 byt
119. YER YES  BYPASS FLOW YES  CONVERTER SS  DILUTION NO    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    AUTO CALIBRATION NO    CONTACT INFORMATION   CALL CENTER  508 520 0430  WEB  WWW THERMO COM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Alarms Menu    3 72  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Alarms Menu  The alarms menu displays a list of items that are monitored by the analyzer   If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit  the status  of that item will go from    OK    to either    LOW    or    HIGH     respectively   If the alarm is not a level alarm  the status will go from    OK    to    FAIL      The number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate how many alarms  have occurred  If no alarms are detected  the number zero is displayed     To see the actual reading of an item and its minimum and maximum limits   move the cursor to the item and press       The zero span check and auto calibration screens are displayed if the  zero span check or auto calibration options are enabled  The motherboard  status  interface board status  and I O expansion board status  if installed   indicates that the power supplies are working and connections are  successful  There are no setting screens for these alarms          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms     ALARMS   ALARMS DETECTED 0   gt INTERNAL TEMP OK  CHAMBER TEMP OK  COOLER TEMP OK  CONVERTER TEMP OK  PRESSURE OK  FLOW OK    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    OZONATOR FLOW OK  ZERO CHECK OK  SPAN CHECK OK  ZERO
120. a time period  10 to 300 seconds  over which  NO  NO2  and NOx measurements are averaged  The average  concentration of the NO  NO2  and NOx readings are calculated for that  time period  The front panel display and analog outputs are updated every  10 seconds with the calculated averages  An averaging time of 10 seconds   for example  means that the average concentration of the last 10 seconds  will be output at each update  An averaging time of 300 seconds means that  the moving average concentration of the last 300 seconds will be output at  each 10 second update  Therefore  the lower the averaging time  the faster  the front panel display and analog outputs respond to concentration  changes  Longer averaging times are typically used to smooth output data     The Averaging Time screen for the single range mode is shown below  In the  dual and auto range modes  an averaging time menu is displayed before the  averaging time screen  This additional menu is needed because dual and  auto range modes have two averaging times  high and low   The averaging  time screens function the same way in the single  dual and auto range  modes  The following averaging times are available  10  20  30  60  90  120   180  240  and 300 seconds  Additional averaging times are available in  manual NO and manual NOx modes  1  2  and 5 seconds  For more  information about the manual mode  see    Auto Manual Mode    later in this  chapter          In the Main Menu  choose Averaging Time          Use 
121. acing a Fan    PMT Cooler and  Reaction Chamber  Assembly  Replacement    Use the following procedure to replace the PMT cooler and reaction  chamber assembly  see Figure 7 6      Equipment Required     PMT cooler    Wrench  7 16 inch    Wrench  9 16 inch    Nut driver  1 4 inch    Philips screwdriver    Wire cutters    Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement    7 12  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    1  Refer to    Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the  Partition Panel    in this chapter to lower the partition panel  then  proceed to the next step below     2  Disconnect the reaction chamber connector from the temperature  control board     3  Snap off the temperature control board from the board mounts     4  Remove the four screws securing the cooler shroud and remove the  shroud     Figure 7 6  PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber    5  Disconnect plumbing connections from the reaction chamber     6  Disconnect the PMT cooler cables from the PMT high voltage power  supply  the input board  and the measurement interface board  Remove  all tie wraps securing the cables     Captive Screws  4     Cooler Shroud    Temperature Control Board    Reaction Chamber    BNC Connector to Input Board  To PMT HVPS    To BENCH on   
122. actors  gt  Calibration Pressure          Use  and  to increment or decrement the calibration  pressure value          Press  to save the new calibration pressure     NO COEFFICIENT   NO  51 4  SET COEF TO  1 000      INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CALIBRATION PRESSURE   PRESSURE  33 8  SET CAL PRES TO  35 0    INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Calibration Menu    3 22  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Reset User Calibration Default  The Reset User Calibration Default screen allows the user to reset the  calibration configuration values to factory defaults          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Calibration Factors  gt  Reset User  Cal Defaults          Press  to warn user and enable restore with            Use  to reset the calibration pressure reference value when pressed  after       Calibration Menu  The Calibration menu is used to calibrate the analyzer  including zero  backgrounds  the NO  NO2  and NOx coefficients  and the calibration  pressure  The screens below show the calibration menu in single mode and  dual auto range modes     The calibration procedure is the same in dual  auto  or single range   however  there are two sets of gas coefficients in dual or auto range  i e  low  and high coefficients   This enables each range to be calibrated separately   When calibrating the instrument in dual or auto range  be sure to use a low  span gas to calibrate the low range and a high 
123. address gt   if present  matches the Instrument Address  and  the command is terminated with either  lt CR gt  with no checksum or  lt ETX gt   followed by the correct checksum  lt BCC gt      Data Sampling Data  Query Command   DA     Geysitech  Bayern Hessen  Protocol  Geysitech Commands    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual D 5    Sample Data Reply String in response to Data Query Command  DA      In response to a valid data query command  DA  the instrument responds  in the following format      lt STX gt MD02 lt SP gt  lt address gt  lt SP gt  lt measured  value1 gt  lt SP gt  lt status gt  lt SP gt  lt SFKT gt  lt SP gt  lt address 1 gt  lt SP gt  lt measured  value2 gt  lt SP  gt  lt status gt  lt SP gt  lt SFKT gt  lt ETX gt  lt BCC gt     The response uses the same command terminators as used by the received  command i e  if the received command was terminated with a  lt CR gt  the  response is terminated with  lt CR gt  and if the command was terminated  with a  lt ETX gt  lt BCC gt  the response is terminated with lt ETX gt  and the  computed checksum  lt BCC gt      The 02 after the MD indicates  that two measurements are present in the  reply string   a 03 for three measurements and so on  this will also  determine the length of the reply string       lt address gt  is the Instrument Address  Each subsequent measurement  attached to the response will have the  lt address   X gt  where X keeps  incrementing by 1 for each measurement 
124. al Inputs  Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal  instrument modes and special conditions including          NO Measure Mode    System Description  I O Components    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  8 11         NOx Measure Mode         Zero Gas Mode         Span Gas Mode    The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration     The digital inputs are TTL level compatible and are pulled up within the  analyzer  The active state can be user defined in firmware     Serial Ports  Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple analyzers may be  linked using one PC serial port     The standard bi directional serial interface can be configured for either  RS 232 or RS 485  The serial baud rate is user selectable in firmware for  standard speeds from 1200 to 19 200 baud  The user can also set the data  bits  parity  and stop bits  The following protocols are supported          C Link         Streaming Data         Modbus Slave    The Streaming Data protocol transmits user selected measurement data via  the serial port in real time for capture by a serial printer  data logger  or PC     RS 232 Connection  A null modem  crossed  cable is required when connecting the analyzer to  an IBM Compatible PC  However  a straight cable  one to one  may be  required when connecting the analyzer to other remote devices  As a general  rule  when the connector of the host remote device is female  a stra
125. alog output zero and span point through  firmware  At least 5  of full scale over and under range are also supported     The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic  channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter  The  current outputs are independent of the voltage outputs  The current outputs  are isolated from the instrument power and ground  but they share a  common return line  Isolated GND      Analog Voltage Inputs   Optional   The optional I O expansion board includes eight analog voltage inputs   These inputs are used to gather measurement data from third party devices  such as meteorological equipment  The user may assign a label  unit  and a  voltage to user defined unit conversion table  up to 16 points   All voltage  inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to 10 volts     Digital Relay Outputs  The instrument includes one power fail relay on motherboard and ten  digital output relays on the digital output board  These are reed relays rated  for at least 500 mA   200VDC     The power fail relay is Form C  both normally opened and normally closed  contacts   All other relays are Form A  normally opened contacts  and are  used to provide alarm status and mode information from the analyzer  as  well as remote control to other devices  such as for controlling valves during  calibration  The user may select what information is sent out each relay and  whether the active state is opened or closed     Digit
126. ard  gain  This may be used as a troubleshooting tool for the input board  The  gain setting and test mode are reset upon exiting this screen          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Input Board Calibration  gt   Frequency Disp          Press  to leave warning screen          Use  and  to toggle the test signal and bypass the PMT          Use  and  to change the gain between 1  10  and 100     Temperature Calibration  The Temperature calibration screen allows the user to view and set the  ambient temperature sensor calibration  The temperature calibration screen  is visible only when the instrument is in service mode  For more  information on the service mode  see    Service Mode    earlier in the chapter          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Temperature Calibration          Use        and  to move and change the value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION   INPUT BOARD TEST     TO CALIBRATE  GAIN   1  TEST   OFF  XXXXXX   WARNING   XXXXXXX    FREQ   5000  CONCENTRATION CALCULATIONX    CHG GAIN TEST MODE  IS HALTED INSIDE XXXX  THIS SCREEN XXXXXXX    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    WARNING This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument  service technician     Operation  Service Menu    3 92  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Analog Output Calibration  The Analog Output Calibration menu is a selection of 6 voltage channels  and 6 current channels  if I O ex
127. arm maximum value to 215     Send   set alarm conc no max 215  Receive   set alarm conc no max 215 ok    alarm converter temp min  alarm converter temp max  These commands report the converter temperature alarm minimum and  maximum value current settings  The example below reports that the  converter temperature alarm minimum value is 600 0   C     Send   alarm converter temp min  Receive   alarm converter temp min 600 0 deg C    set alarm converter temp min value  set alarm converter temp max value  These commands set the converter temperature alarm minimum and  maximum values to value  where value is a floating point number  representing converter temperature alarm limits in degrees C  The example  below sets the converter temperature alarm maximum value to 640 0   C     C Link Protocol Commands  Alarms    B 14  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Send   set alarm converter temp max 640  Receive   set alarm converter temp max 640 ok    alarm cooler temp min  alarm cooler temp max  These commands report the cooler temperature alarm minimum and  maximum value current settings  The example below reports that the cooler  temperature alarm minimum value is  10 0   C     Send   alarm cooler temp min  Receive   alarm cooler temp min  10 0 deg C    set alarm cooler temp min value  set alarm cooler temp max value  These commands set the cooler temperature alarm minimum and  maximum values to value  where value is a floating point number  representing
128. ate  The Logic State screen is used to change the I O relay to either normally  open or normally closed  The default state is open  which indicates that a  relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is normally open  and closes to trigger the digital input action  If nothing is connected to the  digital input pin  the state should be left at open to prevent the action from  being triggered          Press  to toggle and set the logic state open or closed     NON ALARM STATUS ITEMS    gt NONE  AUTORANGE  NOx   SERVICE  UNITS  ZERO MODE  SPAN MODE  NO MODE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    NOX MODE  SAMPLE MODE  PURGE MODE    DIGITAL INPUT SETTINGS    gt 1 NOP NO MODE  2 NOP NOX MODE  3 NOP SET BACKGROUND  4 NOP CAL TO LO SPAN  5 NOP AOUTS TO ZERO  6 NOP AOUTS TO FS  7 NOP NONE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 53    Instrument Action  The Instrument Action screen allows the user to select the instrument state  that is tied to the selected digital input  The selected item is shown by     lt        after it          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Digital Input Settings  gt  Select Relay  gt  Instrument Action          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to save the new selection for the relay     Analog Output Configuration  The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog output  chann
129. ation  Calibration    4 2  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    3  Be sure the instrument is in the auto mode  that is  NO  NO2  and NOx  measurements are being displayed on the front panel display  If the  instrument is not in auto mode     a   Press  to display the Main Menu  then choose Instrument  Controls  gt  Auto Manual Mode     b  Select NO NOx  and press       c   Press  to return to the Run screen     4  Select the RANGE soft key if available or locate this function in the  menu to display the Range screen     5  Select NO range  and push the AVG soft key to display the Averaging  Time screen  It is recommended that a higher averaging time be used for  best results  For more information about the ranges or averaging time   see the    Operation    chapter     Note The averaging time should be less than the zero duration and less than  the span duration     6  Set the calibration pressure to the current reactor pressure     a   Push    choose  gt  Calibration Factors  gt  Cal Pressure     b  Use  to increment decrement the value to match the  current reactor pressure  and press  to save the new calibration  pressure value     7  Verify that any filters used during normal monitoring are also used  during calibration     8  Connect the analog digital outputs to a strip chart recorder s  or PC s      Calibration  Note that with a Model 42i High Level equipped with internal zero span  and sample valves  the ZERO and SPAN ports should give i
130. ation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 40  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific         Press  to confirm change     Data Treatment  The Data Treatment screen is used to select the data type for the selected  record  whether the data should be averaged over the interval  the minimum  or maximum used  or the current value logged  Data treatment doesn   t apply  to all data  just to the concentration measurement  All other data points log  the current value at the end of the interval          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Configure Datalogging  gt  Data Treatment          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to set the data type     SET PERCENT SRECS   SET PERCENT SRECS   CURRENTLY  50    CURRENTLY  50    SET TO  60      SET TO  60      THIS WILL ERASE ALL LOGS x  PRESS TO CONFIRM CHANGE  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    SET LREC DATA TYPE   CURRENTLY  AVG  SET TO  CUR      CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 41    Communication Settings  The communication Settings menu is used with communications control  and configuration          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings     Baud Rate  The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS 232 RS 485 interface baud rate   Baud rates of 1200  2400  4800  a
131. ature screens function the same way     Note The ozonator will not turn on if the converter is below alarm limit          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Converter Temp  gt  Min or Max          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     CONVERTER TEMPERATURE   ACTUAL 625 0 oC   gt MIN 600 0 oC  MAX 650 0 oC    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CONVERTER TEMPERATURE   ACTUAL MIN  600 0 oC  SET MIN TO  610 0 oC      INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Alarms Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 77    Pressure  The Pressure screen displays the current reaction chamber pressure reading  and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits  Acceptable alarm limits  range from 20 to 100 mmHg  If the pressure reading goes beyond either the  minimum or maximum limit  an alarm is activated  The word    ALARM     appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Pressure     Min and Max Pressure Limits  The Minimum Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum  pressure alarm limit  The minimum and maximum pressure screens  function the same way          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Pressure  gt  Min or Max          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     PRESSURE   ACTUAL 33 8 mmHg   gt MIN 20 0 mmHg  MAX 100 0 mmHg    RANGE AVG DIAG
132. ax value    Cooler Temp  User set alarm min value  User set alarm max value    MINIMUM OUTPUT PERCENT   SELECTED OUTPUT  V ALL  CURRENTLY  N A    SET TO  0000 5      CHANGE VALUE  SAVE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 56  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Choose Signal to Output  The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a submenu list of the analog  output signal group choices  Group choices are Concentrations  Other  Measurements  and Analog Inputs  if the I O expansion board option is  installed   This allows the user to select the output signal to the selected  output channel  The Concentrations screen is shown below  See Table 3 7  below for a list of items for each signal group choice          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Analog Output Config  gt  Select Channel  gt  Choose Signal To Output          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to select a choice     NO2 Converter Temp  User set alarm min value  User set alarm max value    Chamber Pressure  User set alarm min value  User set alarm max value    Flow  User set alarm min value  User set alarm max value    PMT Volts  700 volts  1100 volts    Everything Else  0 units  10 units    Table 3 6  Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Table  continued    Output  Zero   Value  Full Scale 100  Value    Table 3 7  Signal Type Group Choices    Concentrations  Other Measurements  Analog Inputs    Non
133. bb oo pp qq yy  srec aa bb oo pp qq yy  xxxx   the number of past records  yy   the number of records to return  1 to 10   aa   hours  01 to 24   bb   minutes  01 to 59     C Link Protocol Commands  Datalogging    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 19    oo   month  01 to 12   pp   day  01 to 31   qq   year    These commands output long or short records and dynamic data  The  output format is determined by the    set lrec format     and    set srec format     commands  The logging time is determined by the    set lrec per    and    set  srec per    commands  In dual range  the long records and short records  contain the high and low NO and NOx concentrations  In single range the  low NO and low NOx values are set to 0 and the high NO and high NOx  are used  In NO or NOx only mode  the pertinent high value used  other  concentrations are set to 0  Concentrations are stored in either ppm or  mg m3     In the following example  there are 740 long records currently stored in  memory  When the command lrec 100 5 is sent  the instrument counts  back 100 records from the last record collected  record 740   and then  returns 5 records  640  641  642  643  and 644  For details on how to  decode the flag fields within these records  see Figure B 1 in the    flags     command     Send   lrec 100 5  Receive   lrec 100 5  11 03 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no 8416E 1 nox 8458E 1 lono 6474E 1  lonox 6506E 1 pres 131 4 pmtt 53 1 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smpl
134. ber in scratch  pad list  to value  where value is the index number of a variable in the analog  out variable list  Available variables and their corresponding index numbers  may be obtained using the command    list var aout     The    set sp field     command is used to create a list of variables which can then be transferred  into the long record  short record  or streaming data lists  using the    set  copy sp to lrec        set copy sp to srec     or    set copy sp to stream    commands     Send   set sp field 1 34  Receive   set sp field 1 34 ok    stream per  This command reports the currently set time interval in seconds for  streaming data     Send   stream per  Receive   stream per 10    set stream per number value  number value     1   2   5   10   20   30   60   90  120   180   240   300      This command sets the time interval between two consecutive streaming  data strings to number value in seconds  The example below sets the number  value to 10 seconds     Send   set stream per 10  Receive   set stream per 10 ok    stream time  This command reports if the streaming data string will have a time stamp  attached to it or not  according to Table B 5     Send   stream time  Receive   stream time 1    set stream time value  This command enables value  where value is to attach or disable time stamp  to streaming data string  according to Table B 5  The example below  attaches a time stamp to streaming data     C Link Protocol Commands  Calibration    B 24  Model 42i 
135. bient air sample is drawn into the Model 42i High Level through  the sample bulkhead  as shown in Figure 1 1  The sample flows through a  capillary  and then to the mode solenoid valve  The solenoid valve routes the  sample either straight to the reaction chamber  NO mode  or through the  NO2 to NO converter and then to the reaction chamber  NOx mode   A  flow sensor prior to the reaction chamber measures the sample flow     Dry air enters the Model 42i High Level through the dry air bulkhead   passes through a flow switch  and then through a silent discharge ozonator   The ozonator generates the ozone needed for the chemiluminescent  reaction  At the reaction chamber  the ozone reacts with the NO in the  sample to produce excited NO2 molecules  A photomultiplier tube  PMT   housed in a thermoelectric cooler detects the luminescence generated during  this reaction  From the reaction chamber  the exhaust travels through the  ozone  O3  converter to the pump  and is released through the vent     The NO and NOx concentrations calculated in the NO and NOx modes  are stored in memory  The difference between the concentrations is used to  calculate the NO2 concentration  The Model 42i High Level outputs NO         h  O  NO  O  NO  2  2  3                  Introduction  Specifications    Thermo Fisher Scientific  42i High Level Instruction Manual  1 3    NO2  and NOx concentrations to the front panel display  the analog  outputs  and also makes the data available over the serial or 
136. c  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  9 3    Bypass Flow  The regulated bypass flow system is used when the sample must be  transported over a long distance  It is also used when an unstable flow is  being provided  The regulated bypass flow system provides make up air  through the sample regulator and eliminates instrument drift due to  pressure changes     Figure 9 2  Bypass Flow Option Flow Schematic    Permeation Dryer  Assembly  The permeation dryer minimizes routine maintenance procedures by  providing a continuous stream of dry air to the ozonator  using the selective  water permeation characteristics of the dryer   With the permeation dryer  option  it is not necessary to constantly replenish the ozonator air drying  column as in the standard instrument     Refer to the    Operation    chapter for more information     Ammonia Scrubber  The ammonia scrubber is mounted internally and removes ammonia from  the sample air     Optional Equipment  Teflon Particulate Filter    9 4  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Teflon Particulate  Filter  A 5 10 micron pore size  two inch diameter Teflon   element is available for  the Model 42i High Level  This filter should be installed just prior to the  SAMPLE bulkhead  When using a filter  all calibrations and span checks  must be performed through the filter     Ozone Particulate  Filter  The ozone particulate filter minimizes the potential for contamination of  the ozonator by trapping any 
137. c electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  Photomultiplier Tube Replacement    7 14  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    cover plate  Figure 7 7   If the cooler fan is attached  unplug the fan  power cord if necessary     Figure 7 7  Replacing the PMT    4  Remove the three retaining screws holding PMT base assembly to the  cooler using a 5 16 inch nut driver     5  Pull the PMT and PMT base from cooler assembly by twisting it slightly  back and forth     6  To install PMT  follow previous steps in reverse making sure to backfill  the cooler with dry air or nitrogen prior to replacing the PMT     7  Perform a photomultiplier tube calibration  See    Photomultiplier Tube  Calibration    in the    Operation    chapter     PMT Cover Plate Screws  3     PMT Shroud Screws  4     PMT Base Screws  3     PMT Base Assembly    Equipment Damage Do not point the photomultiplier tube at a light  source  This can permanently damage the tube     Servicing  PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 15    PMT High Voltage  Power Supply  Replacement    Use the following procedure to replace the PMT high voltage power supply   Figure 7 8      Equipment Required     PMT high voltage power supply    Nut driver  1 4 inch    Philips screwdriver    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover 
138. calibrated separately  This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one  another  For example  if the low NO range is set to 0   50 ppm and the high  NO range is set to 0   1 000 ppm     By default  in the dual range mode  the analog outputs are arranged on the  rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 5  See Table 3 3 for channels and  pin connections  Dual range mode may be selected from the     Single Dual Auto Select    in the    Service Menu     later in this chapter     Figure 3 5  Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode    Operation  Range Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 11    Table 3 3  Default Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode    Note All channels are user definable  If any customization has been made to  the analog output configuration  the default selections may not apply     Auto Range Mode  The auto range mode switches the NO  NO2 and NOx analog outputs  between high and low ranges  depending on the NOx concentration level   except when continuous NO mode is active  The high and low ranges are  defined in the Range menu     For example  suppose the low ranges are set to 50 ppm and the high ranges  are set to 100 ppm  Figure 3 6   Sample concentrations below 50 ppm are  presented to the low ranges analog outputs and sample concentrations  above 50 ppm are presented to the high ranges analog outputs  When the  low ranges are active  the status output is at 0 volts  When the high ranges  are active  th
139. cks    lrec per  srec per  These commands report the long and short records logging period  The  example below shows that the short record logging period is 5 minutes     Send   srec per  Receive   srec per 5 min    set srec per value  set srec per value  value     1   5   15   30   60      These commands set the long and short records logging period to value in  minutes  The example below sets the long record logging period to 15  minutes     Send   set lrec per 15  Receive   set lrec per 15 ok    no of lrec  no of srec  These commands report the number of long and short records stored in the  long and short records memory  The example below shows that 50 long  records have been stored in the memory     Send   no of lrec  Receive   no of lrec 50 recs    malloc lrec  malloc srec  These commands report the currently set memory allocation for long and  short records in percent of total memory     Send   malloc lrec  Receive   malloc lrec 10     C Link Protocol Commands  Datalogging    B 22  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    set malloc lrec value  set malloc srec value  value   0 to 100    These commands set the percent of memory space allocated for long and  short records to value  where value is a floating point number representing  percent  The example below sets the memory allocation for long records to  10     Note Issuing these commands will clear all the logging data memory  All the  existing records should be retrieved using appropriate
140. concentration  B 10    no bkg  Reports sets current NO background  B 26    no coef  Reports sets current NO coefficient  B 25    no gas  Reports sets NO span gas concentration  B 25    no of lrec  Reports sets number of long records stored in memory  B 21    no of srec  Reports sets number of short records stored in memory  B 21    no2  Reports current NO2 concentration  B 10    no2 coef  Reports sets current NO2 coefficient  B 25    no2 gas  Reports sets NO2 span gas concentration  B 25    nox  Reports current NOx concentration  B 10    nox bkg  Reports sets current NOx background  B 26    nox coef  Reports sets current NOx coefficient  B 25    nox gas  Reports sets NOx span gas concentration  B 25    ozonator  Reports sets ozonator on or off  B 34    ozonator flow  Reports current ozonator flow  B 34    ozonator safety  Reports sets ozonator safety on or off  B 34    ozonator status  Reports status of ozonator and safety  B 35    pmt status  Reports sets PMT status on or off  B 35    pmt temp  Reports temperature of the PMT cooler  same as cooler  temperature   B 11    pmt voltage  Reports current PMT voltage  B 11    Table B 1  C Link Protocol Commands  continued    Command  Description  Page    C Link Protocol Commands  Commands    B 8  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    pres  Reports current reaction chamber pressure  B 11    pres cal  Reports sets pressure used for calibration  B 27    pres comp  Reports sets pressure compensation on or
141. configuration  the default selections may not apply     Channel  Pin  Description    1  14  NO Analog Output    2  33  NO2 Analog Output    3  15  NOx Analog Output    4  34  Range Status     half scale   high range    zero scale   low range    5  17  None    6  36  None    Ground  16  18  19  35  37  Signal Ground    Operation  Range Menu    3 14  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Gas Units  The Gas Units screen defines how the NO  NO2 and NOx concentration  readings are expressed  Gas units of parts per million  ppm  and milligrams  per cubic meter  mg m3  are available  The mg m3 gas concentration mode  is calculated using a standard pressure of 760 mmHg and a standard  temperature of 20   C     When switching the selected units from ppm to mg m3  the analog ranges  all default to the highest range in that mode  For example  when switching  from mg m3 to ppm  all the ranges default to 5 000 ppm  Therefore   whenever you change units  you should also check the range settings          In the Main Menu  choose Range  gt  Gas Units          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to save the new units     Note If the units change from ppm to mg m3 or vice versa  the instrument  should be recalculated  particularly if the user   s standard temperature is  different from 20   C  A display warning will appear that ranges will be  defaulted and calibration parameters reset     NO  NO2  and NOx Ranges  The NO  NO2  and NOx Ra
142. cs and measurement system  These illustrations can be  used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table 6 3 through  Table 6 9 to troubleshoot board level faults     Figure 6 1  Board Level Connection Diagram   Common Electronics    2 Pin    P1    DIGITAL  OUTPUTS    24VDC  POWER SUPPLY    MOTHER BOARD    DIGITAL OUTPUT  BOARD    I O EXPANSION  BOARD    J14  J3    FRONT  PANEL  BOARD  J1    LCD  DISPLAY    KEY PANEL    J18    J2    J4    J3    J1    J10    J17    PJ1  PJ3  PJ2    FRONT PANEL  POWER SW    16 Pin    4 Pin    8 Pin    34 Pin    3 Pin    2 Pin    3 Pin  3 Pin  3 Pin    PJ6    3 Pin    IPJ8    3 Pin    8 Pin  11 Pin    2 Pin    EXPANSION RS485    ANALOG OUTPUTS   DIGITAL INPUTS    P1 A    P1 B    RS232 RS485    J2  10 BASE T    J15    J5    15 Pin    8 Pin    37 Pin    9 Pin    9 Pin  RS232 RS485    J1  EXPANSION I O    J2    25 Pin    37 Pin    AC    AC  REAR PANEL  AC INPUT  3 Cond  AC    POWER_GOOD    24VDC    TRANSFORMER   90VAC or 240VAC  OPTIONS     J4 8 Pin  SPARE DATA    DATA    TO MEASUREMENT SYSTEM    Troubleshooting  Board Level Connection Diagrams    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  6 7    Figure 6 2  Board Level Connection Diagram   Measurement System    DATA    J1    3 Pin    SAMPLE SOL     SPARE 2 SOL     ZERO SPAN SOL     NO NOX SOL     GAS THERM     AMBIENT TEMP  THERM     MEASUREMENT  INTERFACE BOARD    FAN2    PUMP  3 Pin    2 Pin    2 Pin    2 Pin    3 Pin    4 Pin    CHAMBER PRESSURE    2 Pin    COOLER 
143. ctronics        6 6  Board Level Connection Diagram   Measurement System       6 7  Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap                                7 4  Component Layout                                                                  7 7  Removing the Measurement Bench and  Lowering the Partition Panel                                                    7 8  Replacing the Pump                                                               7 10  Replacing a Fan                                                                      7 11  PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber                                      7 12  Replacing the PMT                                                                7 14  Replacing the PMT HVPS                                                     7 16  Cleaning or Removing the Reaction Chamber                       7 19  NO2 to NO Stainless Steel Converter Assembly                    7 21  Replacing the Solenoid Valve                                                 7 23  Replacing the Ozonator Assembly                                          7 24  Replacing the Input Board                                                     7 26  Replacing the DC Power Supply                                            7 29  Rear Panel Analog Voltage Output Pins                                 7 30  Replacing the Pressure Transducer                                         7 33  Replacing the Scrubber                                                           7 39  Re
144. d    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  9 1    Chapter 9 Optional Equipment    The Model 42i High Level is available with the following options             Internal Zero Span Assembly    on page 9 1            Bypass Flow    on page 9 3            Ammonia Scrubber    on page 9 3            Teflon Particulate Filter    on page 9 4            Ozone Particulate Filter    on page 9 4            NO2 to NO Converter    on page 9 4            I O Expansion Board Assembly    on page 9 4            Terminal Block and Cable Kits    on page 9 4            Mounting Options    on page 9 5    Internal Zero Span  Assembly  With the internal zero span assembly option  a source of span gas is  connected to the SPAN port and a source of zero air is connected to the  ZERO port as shown in Figure 9 1  Zero and span gas should be supplied at  atmospheric pressure  It may be necessary to use an atmospheric dump  bypass plumbing arrangement to accomplish this  Refer to    Setup  Procedure    in the    Installation    chapter for an illustration of an atmospheric  dump bypass arrangement     For more information  refer to the    Installation    chapter  If this option is  installed  refer to the    Operation    chapter for more information     Optional Equipment  Internal Zero Span Assembly    9 2  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Figure 9 1  Zero Span Option Flow Diagram    Optional Equipment  Bypass Flow    Thermo Fisher Scientifi
145. d as  a string       NO 18sBd ddd set no coef  s n     This is a line which also appears slightly indented  The next field is also   NO   but the value is taken from the eighteenth element of the data  response  again interpreted as a string  A button appears on this line which   when pressed  pops up an input dialog which will state  Please enter a new  value for NO using a d ddd format   The string entered by the user is used  to construct the output command  If the user enters  for example   1 234    the constructed command will be  set no coef 1 234        NO 21f Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3 Code_4 Code_5 Code_6 Code_7  Code_8 Code_9 Code_10 Code_11 Lset range no  d n     This is a line which appears slightly indented  the title is again  NO   and  the value the twenty first element of the data response  interpreted as a  floating point number  There is a no translation button which creates a  selection list of twelve  Code nn  options  The number of the user selection  is used to create the output command      Mode 6 12 13x local remote service service  0 1 Tset mode  s n     This is a line which has a title of  Mode   and value taken from the sixth field  of the data response  There is a bitfield extraction of bits 12 through 13  from the source  the value type is not important here because the value is  being translated to an output string   Once the bits have been extracted   they are shifted down to the bit zero position  Thus  the possible values of  this example wil
146. dentical  responses to the sample port when test gases are introduced  The user should  calibrate the Model 42i High Level using the sample port to introduce the  zero and span gas sources  After calibration  the zero and span sources  should be plumbed to the appropriate ports on the rear panel of the Model    Calibration  Calibration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  4 3    42i High Level  and then reintroduced to the instrument  The Model 42i  High Level should give identical responses to the test gases whether they are  introduced via the sample port or the zero or span ports  If not  the  plumbing and or valves should be serviced     The following procedure discusses calibration of the Model 42i High Level  analyzer using the gas phase titrator and zero gas generator previously  described  It is suggested that a calibration curve have at least seven points  between the zero and full scale NO concentrations  Although the  seven point curve is optional  two of whatever number of points is chosen  should be located at the zero and 90  levels and the remaining points  equally spaced between these values     Connecting the GPT  Apparatus  Use the following procedure to connect the GPT apparatus     1  Assemble a dynamic calibration system such as the one shown in    Figure 4 1     Figure 4 1  GPT System    2  Ensure that all flowmeters are calibrated under the conditions of use  against a reliable standard  such as a soap bubble meter or we
147. display is where you enter  the NO2 calibration gas concentration     10  Set the NO2 calibration gas concentration to reflect the sum of the  following  the NO2 concentration generated by GPT    NO ORIG     NO REM   and any NO2 impurity     Use  to move the cursor left and right and use  to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor     Where     NO2 OUT   diluted NO2 concentration at the output manifold  ppm     NO ORIG   original NO concentration  prior to addition of O3  ppm     NO REM   NO concentration remaining after addition of O3  ppm    11  Press  to calculate and save the new NO2 coefficient based on the  entered span concentration     The analyzer does a one point NO2 span coefficient calculation  corrects  the NO2 reading for converter inefficiency  and then adds the corrected  NO2 to the NO signal to give a corrected NOx signal     If the analyzer calculates a NO2 span coefficient of less than 0 96  either  the entered NO2 concentration is incorrect  the converter is not being  heated to the proper temperature  the instrument needs servicing  leak  or imbalance   or the converter needs replacement or servicing  The  NO2 analog output will reflect the NO2 concentration generated by  GPT  any NO2 impurity  and the NO2 zero offset     F     F     F       NO     x  F            NO          NO        NO       D  O  NO    IMP  2  NO  REM  ORIG  OUT  2    Calibration  Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i 
148. e                                                                5 1  Safety Precautions                                                                    5 1  Replacement Parts                                                                   5 1  Cleaning the Outside Case                                                      5 2  Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement                    5 2  Capillaries Inspection and Replacement                                   5 2    Contents    viii  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning              5 4  Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning                                        5 4  Pump Rebuilding                                                                    5 5    Chapter 6  Troubleshooting                                                                               6 1  Safety Precautions                                                                    6 1  Troubleshooting Guides                                                          6 2  Board Level Connection Diagrams                                          6 6  Connector Pin Descriptions                                                    6 8  Service Locations                                                                   6 22    Chapter 7  Servicing                                                                                           7 1  Safety Precautions                   
149. e  None  None    NO  single auto range mode   Internal Temp  Analog Input 1    NO2  single auto range mode   Chamber Temp  Analog Input 2    NOx  single auto range mode   Cooler Temp  Analog Input 3    CHOOSE SIGNAL   CONC  SELECTED OUTPUT  V1  CURRENTLY  NONE  SET TO  NONE      CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 57    Analog Input Configuration  The Analog Input Configuration menu displays a list of the 8 analog input  channels available for configuration  This screen is displayed if the I O  expansion board option is installed  Configuration includes entering  descriptor  units  decimal places  choice of 1 10 points in the table  and  corresponding number of points selected          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Analog Input Config     LO NO  dual mode   NO2 Converter Temp  Analog Input 4    LO NO2  dual mode   Chamber Pressure  Analog Input 5    LO NOx  dual mode   Flow  Analog Input 6    HI NO  dual mode   PMT Volts  Analog Input 7    HI NO2  dual mode   Analog Input 8    HI NOx  dual mode     Range  NOx   auto range mode     Table 3 7  Signal Type Group Choices  continued    Concentrations  Other Measurements  Analog Inputs    ANALOG INPUT CONFIG    gt CHANNEL 1 IN1  CHANNEL 2 IN2  CHANNEL 3 IN3  CHANNEL 4 IN4  CHANNEL 5 IN5  CHANNEL 6 IN6  CHANNEL 7 IN7    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ANALOG INPUT 01 CONFIG    gt
150. e  response     These requests specify the starting address  i e  the address of the first output  specified  and the number of outputs  The outputs are addressed starting at  zero  Therefore  outputs numbered 1   16 are addressed as 0   15     MODBUS Protocol  Function Codes    C 4  42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of the data  field  Status is indicated as 1   Active  on  and 0   Inactive  off   The LSB  of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query  The other  outputs follow toward the high order end of this byte  and from low order to  high order in subsequent bytes  If the returned output quantity is not a  multiple of eight  the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded  with zeros  toward the high order end of the byte   The Byte Count field  specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data     Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relays in the  instrument  as the user may program these outputs for either active closed or  open      N   Quantity of Outputs   8  if the remainder not equal to zero  then N N 1    Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 2   15     Request    Function code  1 Byte  0x01 or 0x02    Starting Address  2 Bytes  0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument    Quantity of outputs  2 Bytes  1 to maximum allowed by instrument    Unit Identifier  1 Byte  0x00 to 0xFF  Passed back in re
151. e 0xAB hex checksum will be  represented by the two characters    A     amp     B        The checksum is referred to as  lt BCC gt  throughout this document     The following commands are supported by the Geysitech protocol          Instrument Control Command  ST          Data Sampling Data Query Command  DA     There are three control commands supported by the Geysitech protocol     This  lt control command gt  is a single letter  which triggers an action in the  instrument  These commands are active only when service mode is inactive  and the zero span option is present     Command    N    switches the instrument gas mode to Zero mode     Command    K    switches the instrument gas mode to Span mode     Command    M    switches the instrument gas mode to Sample mode     The following are the different acceptable formats of the ST command      lt STX gt ST lt address gt  lt control command gt  lt ETX gt  lt BCC gt     OR     lt STX gt ST lt address gt  lt control command gt  lt CR gt     OR     lt STX gt ST lt address gt  lt SP gt  lt control command gt  lt CR gt     OR     lt STX gt ST lt address gt  lt SP gt  lt control command gt  lt ETX gt  lt BCC gt     Block Checksum   lt BCC gt     Geysitech Commands    Instrument Control Command   ST     Geysitech  Bayern Hessen  Protocol  Geysitech Commands    D 4 Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    The  lt address gt  is optional  which means it can be left out completely  The   lt address gt  if pr
152. e Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Cooler Temp     Min and Max Cooler Temperature  Limits  The Minimum Cooler Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the  minimum cooler temperature alarm limit  The minimum and maximum  cooler temperature screens function the same way          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Cooler Temp  gt  Min or Max          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save set to value as actual value     COOLER TEMPERATURE   ACTUAL  2 8 oC   gt MIN  10 0 oC  MAX  1 0 oC    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    COOLER TEMPERATURE   ACTUAL MIN   10 0 oC  SET MIN TO   9 0 oC      INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Alarms Menu    3 76  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Converter Temperature  The Converter Temperature screen displays the current converter  temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits  Acceptable  alarm limits range from 300 to 700   C  The actual alarm setpoints should be  set for the installed converter  If the converter temperature reading goes  beyond either the minimum or maximum limit  an alarm is activated  The  word    ALARM    appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Converter Temp     Min and Max Converter  Temperature Limits  The Minimum Converter Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change  the minimum converter temperature alarm limit  The minimum and  maximum converter temper
153. e Mode                                                              3 10  Auto Range Mode                                                              3 11  Gas Units                                                                           3 14  NO  NO2  and NOx Ranges                                              3 14  Set Custom Ranges                                                             3 16  Averaging Time                                                                     3 17  Calibration Factors Menu                                                      3 18  NO and NOx Backgrounds                                                3 18  NO  NO2  and NOx Coefficients                                       3 20  Calibration Pressure                                                            3 21  Calibration Menu                                                                  3 22  Calibrate NO and NOx Background                                  3 23  Calibrate NO  NO2  and NOx Coefficients                        3 24  Calibrate Pressure                                                               3 25  Zero Span Check                                                               3 25    Contents    vi  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Instrument Controls Menu                                                   3 29  Ozonator                                                                            3 29  PMT Supply                  
154. e instrument to local or remote mode  The example  below sets the instrument to the local mode     Send   set mode local  Receive   set mode local ok    program no  This command reports the analyzer   s model information and program  version number  which will be dependant on the current version     Send   program no  Receive   program no iSeries 42iHL 01 00 01 074    C Link Protocol Commands  I O Configuration    B 40  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    set layout ack  This command disables the stale layout layout change indicator           that is  attached to each response if the layout has changed     Send   set layout ack  Receive   set layout ack ok    I O Configuration  analog iout range channel  This command reports the analog current output range setting for channels   where channel must be between 1 and 6  inclusive  The example below  reports current output channel 4 to the 4 20 mA range  according to  Table B 9  This command responds with    feature not enabled    if the I O  expansion board is not detected     Send   analog iout range 4  Receive   analog iout range 4 2    set analog iout range channel range  This command sets analog current output channel to the channel range  where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive  and range is set according to  Table B 9  The example below sets current output channel 4 to the 0 20 mA  range  This command responds with    feature not enabled    if the I O  expansion board is not detected    
155. e previous steps in reverse     Analog Output Testing  The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front  panel display disagrees with the analog outputs  To check the analog  outputs  you connect a meter to an analog voltage output channel and  compare the meter reading with the output value set on the Test Analog  Outputs screen     Use the following procedure to test the analog outputs     1  Connect a meter to the channel to be tested  Figure 7 15 shows the  analog output pins and Table 7 3 identifies the associated channels     Power Supply  Retaining Screws  4     BOTTOM VIEW    Captive Screw    Servicing  Analog Output Testing    7 30  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Figure 7 15  Rear Panel Analog Voltage Output Pins    2  From the Main Menu  press  to scroll to Diagnostics   gt  press   gt   to scroll to Test Analog Outputs  and press       The Test Analog Outputs screen appears     3  Press  to scroll to the channel  Voltage Channel 1 6   corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin where the meter is  connected  and press       Table 7 3  Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections    Channel  Pin    1  14    2  33    3  15    4  34    5  17    6  36    Ground  16  18  19  35  37    Servicing  Analog Output Adjustment    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 31    The Set Analog Outputs screen appears     4  Press  to set the output to full scale     The Output Se
156. e status output is at half of full scale     When the high ranges are active  the NOx concentration must drop to 95   of the low NOx range for the low ranges to become active     In addition to each channel having two ranges  each channel has two span  coefficients  There are two span coefficients so that each range can be  calibrated separately  This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one  another  For example  if the low NO range is set to 0   50 ppm and the high  NO range is set to 0   1 000 ppm     Channel  Pin  Description    1  14  NO High Range    2  33  NO2 High Range    3  15  NOx High Range    4  34  NO Low Range    5  17  NO2 Low Range    6  36  NOx Low Range    Ground  16  18  19  35  37  Signal Ground    Operation  Range Menu    3 12  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Figure 3 6  Analog Output in Auto Range Mode    By default  in the auto range mode  the analog outputs are arranged on the  rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 7  See Table 3 4 for channels and  pin connections  Auto range mode may be selected from the     Single Dual Auto Select    in the    Service Menu     later in this chapter     Operation  Range Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 13    Figure 3 7  Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Auto Range Mode    Table 3 4  Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode    Note All channels are user definable  If any customization has been made to  the analog output 
157. ee  Figure 7 3      Figure 7 3  Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel    Equipment Required     Philips screwdriver    1  Turn instrument OFF and unplug the power cord     2  If the instrument is mounted in a rack  remove it from the rack     Loosen Captive Screw    Pass Through  Connectors    Partition Panel    REMOVE SCREWS    Remove Screw    Remove Screws  Remove Screw    SLIDE BENCH OUT    Remove Hidden Screw  LOWER BENCH    Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  Pump Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 9    3  Remove the cover     4  Disconnect the plumbing connections at the rear of the measurement  bench     5  Disconnect the three connectors that pass through the center of the  partition panel     6  Remove two screws from the left side of the case  viewed from front      7  Remove one screw from the bottom front of the case     8  Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel     9  While holding the case securely  loosen the captive screw at the rear of  the measurement bench  and pull the measurement bench from the rear  of the case     10  Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel securing the top  of partition panel to the measurement bench  and lower the panel being  careful not to put excessive t
158. el  pulled high    Serial Ports  1 RS 232 or RS 485 with two connectors  baud rate 1200   115200   data bits  parity  and stop bits  protocols  C Link  MODBUS  and  streaming data  all user selectable     Ethernet connection  RJ45 connector for 10Mbs Ethernet connection  static or dynamic  TCP IP addressing     In non condensing environments  Performance specifications based on operation in 15   35   C range     Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  2 1    Chapter 2 Installation    Installing the Model 42i High Level includes the following  recommendations and procedures             Lifting    on page 2 1            Unpacking and Inspection    on page 2 1            Setup Procedure    on page 2 2            Startup    on page 2 5    Lifting  When lifting the instrument  use procedure appropriate to lifting a heavy  object  such as  bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and  upright  Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of  the unit  Although one person can lift the unit  it is desirable to have two  persons lifting  one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by  grasping the bottom in the rear     Unpacking and  Inspection  The Model 42i High Level is shipped in two containers  If there is obvious  damage to the shipping container when you receive the instrument  notify  the carrier immediately and hold for inspection  The carrier is responsible  for any damage incurred during shipment     Use 
159. els available for configuration  Channel choices include all voltage  channels  all current channels  voltage channels 1 6  and current channels  1 6  if the I O expansion board option is installed   Configuration choices  include selecting range  setting minimum maximum values  and choosing  signal to output          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Analog Output Config     DIGITAL INPUT SETUP    gt LOGIC STATE OPEN  INSTRUMENT ACTION    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CHOOSE ACTION    gt NONE  ZERO MODE  SPAN MODE  NO MODE  lt     NOX MODE  SET BACKGROUND  CAL TO LO SPAN    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    AOUTS TO ZERO  AOUTS TO FS  CAL TO HI SPAN    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 54  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Select Output Range  The Select Output Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the  selected analog output channel  Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are   0 100 mV  0 1  0 5  0 10 V          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Analog Output Config  gt  Select Channel  gt  Select Range          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to save the new range     OUTPUT CHANNELS    gt ALL VOLTAGE CHANNELS  ALL CURRENT CHANNELS  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 1  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 2  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 3  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 4  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 5    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIG    gt SELECT RANGE  SET MINIMUM VALUE  SET MAXIMUM V
160. ension on the cables     11  Replace the measurement bench by following previous steps in reverse     Pump Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the pump  see Figure 7 4  To  rebuild the pump  see    Pump Rebuilding    in the    Preventive Maintenance     chapter     Equipment Required     110V pump or 220V pump    Wrench  9 16 inch    1  Disconnect the pump power line from the AC power outlet     Servicing  Fan Replacement    7 10  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Figure 7 4  Replacing the Pump    2  Remove both inlet and exhaust lines from the pump     3  Install the new pump by following the previous steps in reverse     Fan Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the fan  Figure 7 5      Equipment Required     Fan    Philips screwdriver    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Remove the fan guard from the fan and remove the filter     Captive Screws  2     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 11    3  Pull the power connectors off the fan     4  Remove the four fan mounting screws and remove the fan     5  Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse     Figure 7 5  Repl
161. eports that the PMT is on     Send   pmt status  Receive   pmt status on    set pmt onoff  These commands set the PMT on or off  The example below turns the PMT  off     Send   set pmt off  Receive   set pmt off ok    save  set save params  This command stores all current parameters in FLASH memory  It is  important that each time instrument parameters are changed  that this  command be sent  If changes are not saved  they will be lost in the event of  a power failure  The example below saves the parameters to FLASH  memory     Send   set save params  Receive   set save params ok    time  This command reports the current time  24 hour time   The example  below reports that the internal time is 2 15 30 pm     Send   time  Receive   time 14 15 30    set time hh mm ss  hh   hours  mm   minutes  ss   seconds    This command sets the internal clock  24 hour time   The example below  sets the internal time to 2 15 pm     C Link Protocol Commands  Communications Configuration    B 36  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Note if seconds are omitted  the seconds default to 00     Send   set time 14 15  Receive   set time 14 15 ok    Communications  Configuration    addr dns  This command reports the TCP IP address for the domain name server     Send   addr dns  Receive   addr dns 192 168 1 1    set addr dns address  This command sets the domain name server address  where address consists  of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive  separated by      
162. equirements  the factory should be consulted     Equipment Required  A zero air source  free of contaminants such as NO  NO2  and O3 is  required for dilution  calibration  and gas phase titration  This can be a  cylinder of zero gas  a scrubbed  compressed air source  or room air   depending on the concentration of NOx to be measured and the level of  NOx in the ambient area     Pre Calibration  Use the following procedure before calibrating the Model 42i High Level   For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in  these procedures  see the    Operation    chapter     Note The calibration and calibration check duration times should be long  enough to account for the transition  purge  process when switching from  sample to zero and from zero to span  This transition time is the time  required to purge the existing air     Depending on the plumbing configuration and the instrument  data from  approximately the first minute of a zero calibration or check should be  disregarded because of residual sample air  Also  data from approximately  the first minute of a span calibration or check should be disregarded because  the span is mixing with the residual zero air     1  Allow the instrument to warm up and stabilize     2  Be sure the ozonator is ON  If the ozonator is not ON     a   Press  to display the Main Menu  then choose Instrument  Controls  gt  Ozonator     b  Press  to toggle the ozonator ON     c   Press  to return to the Run screen     Calibr
163. er RS 232 485  RTU protocol  as well as TCP IP  over Ethernet     The MODBUS Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in  this document  The MODBUS protocol support for the iSeries enables the  user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and  other analog values or variables  read the status of the digital outputs of the  analyzer  and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the  instrument  This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS commands  listed below     For details of the Model 42i High Level MODBUS Protocol specification   see the following topics             Serial Communication Parameters    on page C 2 describes the  parameters used to support MODBUS RTU protocol             TCP Communication Parameters    on page C 2 describes the  parameters used for TCP connection             Application Data Unit Definition    on page C 2 describes the formats  used over serial and TCP IP             Function Codes    on page C 3 describes the various function codes  supported by the instrument             MODBUS Commands Supported    on page C 8 lists the MODBUS  commands supported in Table C 1 through Table C 3     Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at  http   www modbus org  References are from MODBUS Application  Protocol Specification V1 1a MODBUS IDA June 4  2004     MODBUS Protocol  Serial Communication Parameters    C 2  42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    
164. ermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 85    The pressure sensor   s zero counts and span slope are displayed on the menu          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Pressure Calibration     Calibrate Pressure Zero  The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen calibrates the pressure sensor at zero  pressure     Note A vacuum pump must be connected to the pressure sensor before  performing the zero calibration          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Pressure Calibration  gt  Zero          Press  to save the current pressure reading as the zero reading     Calibrate Pressure Span  The Calibrate Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the  pressure sensor calibration span point     WARNING This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument  service technician     PRESSURE SENSOR CAL    gt ZERO 72  SPAN 1 1447  SET DEFAULTS    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CALIBRATE PRESSURE ZERO   CURRENTLY  33 8 mmHg  SET TO  0 0 mmHg      CONNECT VACUUM PUMP AND    SAVE ZERO PRESSURE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    3 86  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Note The plumbing going to the pressure sensor should be disconnected so  the sensor is reading ambient pressure before performing the span  calibration  The operator should use an independent barometer to measure  the ambient pressure and enter the value on this screen before calibrating          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Pressure
165. ero valve  option and is in    SAMPLE    mode  Other modes appear in the same area of  the display as    ZERO    or    SPAN     For more information about the  optional solenoid valves  see Chapter 9     Optional Equipment        When operating in dual or auto range mode  two sets of coefficients are used  to calculate the NO NO2 NOx    LOW    and    HIGH    concentrations  Also   two averaging times are used   one for each range  The title bar indicates  which range concentrations are displayed  The words    LOW RANGE  CONCENTRATION    on the top of the display indicates that the low  concentration is displayed  The display shows as default the low  concentrations  In dual range mode  pressing the  and  arrows  will toggle between high and low concentrations  The example below shows  the Run screen in single range mode     Operation  Software Overview    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 7    Main Menu  The Main Menu contains a number of submenus  Instrument parameters  and features are divided into these submenus according to their function   The concentration appears above the main menu and submenus in every  screen  as shown below  The Service menu is visible only when the  instrument is in service mode  For more information on the service mode   see    Service Mode    later in this chapter          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to select a choice          Press  to return to the Main Menu or  to return to the 
166. ers are normally closed     set relay open  set relay open value  set relay closed  set relay closed value  These commands set the relay logic to normally open or closed for relay  number value  where value is the relay between 1 and 16  The example  below sets the relay no 1 logic to normally open     Note if the command is sent without an appended relay number then all the  relays are assigned the set logic of normally open closed     Send   set relay open 1  Receive   set relay open 1 ok    Record Layout  Definition  The Erec  Lrec  and Srec Layouts contain the following          A format specifier for parsing ASCII responses         A format specifier for parsing binary responses    In addition to these  the Erec Layout contains          A format specifier for producing the front panel displays    In operation  values are read in using either the ASCII or binary format  specifiers and converted to uniform internal representations  32 bit floats or  32 bit integers   These values are converted into text for display on the  screen using the format specifier for the front panel display  Normally  the  specifier used to parse a particular datum from the input stream will be  strongly related to the specifier used to display it  e g   all of the floating  point inputs will be displayed with an  f  output specifier  and all of the  integer inputs will be displayed with a  d  specifier      C Link Protocol Commands  Record Layout Definition    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i
167. esent must match the Instrument Address  Additional space  can be present after the  lt address gt      If the received command does not satisfy the above formats or if the   lt address gt  does not match the Instrument Address the command is ignored     This is a sample command to switch the instrument to zero mode   instrument id 5      lt STX gt ST005 lt SP gt N lt CR gt      This command DA initiates a data transfer from the instrument  The  instrument responds with measurement data  which depends on the range  mode and is listed in    Measurements reported in response to DA  command    below     The command structure for a data query command is as follows      lt STX gt DA lt address gt  lt ETX gt  lt BCC gt     The  lt address gt  is optional  which means it can be left out completely  The   lt address gt  if present must match the Instrument Address  Additional space  can be present after the  lt address gt      If the  lt address gt  is left out then no space is allowed in the query string     A command with no address is also a valid command     The following are the different acceptable formats of the DA command  with Instrument Address 5      lt STX gt DA lt CR gt      lt STX gt DA005 lt CR gt      lt STX gt DA lt SP gt  lt SP gt 5 lt ETX gt  lt BCC gt      lt STX gt DA lt ETX gt  lt BCC gt     The data query string is valid and will be answered with data transmission  only if the command starts with  lt STX gt  which is followed by the characters  DA  and the  lt 
168. et dout 4 11 open  Receive   set dout 4 11 open ok    dtoa channel  This reports the outputs of the 6 or 12 digital to analog converters   according to Table B 11  The example below shows that the DAC 1 is  97 7  full scale     Send   dtoa 1  Receive   dtoa 1 97 7     Note All channel ranges are user definable  If any customization has been  made to the analog output configuration  the default selections may not  apply     Table B 11  Default Output Assignment    D to A  Function  Single Range  Dual Range  Autorange    1  Voltage Output  NO  High NO  High Low NO    2  Voltage Output  NO2  High NO2  High Low NO2    3  Voltage Output  NOx  High NOx  High Low NOx    4  Voltage Output  Not Assigned  Low NO  Range Status    5  Voltage Output  Not Assigned  Low NO2  Not Assigned    6  Voltage Output  Not Assigned  Low NOx  Not Assigned    7  Current Output  NO  High NO  High Low NO    8  Current Output  NO2  High NO2  High Low NO2    9  Current Output  NOx  High NOx  High Low NOx    C Link Protocol Commands  I O Configuration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 43    list var aout  list var dout  list var din  These commands report the list of index numbers  and the variables   associated with that index number  available for selection in the current  mode  determined by single dual auto  gas mode no nox or no nox  for  analog output  digital output and digital inputs  The index number is used  to insert the variable in a field location in a list
169. ethernet  connection     Figure 1 1  Model 42i High Level Flow Schematic  shown with bypass flow  option     Specifications  Table 1 1  Model 42i High Level Specifications    Preset ranges  0 10  20  50  100  200  500  1000  2000  5000 ppm    0 20  50  100  200  500  1000  2000  5000  7500 mg m3    Custom ranges  0 10 to 5000 ppm    0 20 to 7500 mg m3    Zero noise  0 025 ppm    Lower detectable limit  0 050 ppm    Zero drift  24 hour   0 050 ppm    Span drift  24 hour      1  full scale    Response time  in  manual mode   2 5 seconds NO    5 0 seconds NOx    Vacuum  28 5    Hg    Linearity     1  full scale    Sample flow rate  25 cc min     Bypass flow rate  option   250   1100 cc min     Introduction  Specifications    1 4  42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Operating temperature  15   35   C  may be safely operated over the range of 0   45   C      Power requirements  100 VAC   50 60 Hz    115 VAC   50 60 Hz    220   240 VAC   50 60 Hz    500 watts    Physical dimensions  16 75     W  X 8 62     H  X 23     D     Weight  Approximately 70 lbs   including external pump     Analog outputs  6 voltage outputs  0   100 mV  1 V  5 V  10 V  User selectable   5  of  full scale over under range  12 bit resolution  user selectable for  measurement input    Digital outputs  1 power fail relay Form C  10 digital relays Form A  user selectable  alarm output  relay logic  100 mA   200 VDC    Digital inputs  16 digital inputs  user select programmable  TTL lev
170. f  0 500 ozonf 0 000 pmtv  116  11 04 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no 8421E 1 nox 8457E 1 lono 6477E 1  lonox 6505E 1 pres 131 5 pmtt 53 1 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smplf  0 500 ozonf 0 000 pmtv  116  11 05 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no 8440E 1 nox 8456E 1 lono 6492E 1  lonox 6505E 1 pres 131 5 pmtt 53 2 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smplf  0 500 ozonf 0 000 pmtv  116  11 06 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no 8432E 1 nox 8483E 1 lono 6486E 1  lonox 6525E 1 pres 133 0 pmtt 53 0 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smplf  0 500 ozonf 0 000 pmtv  116  11 07 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no 8442E 1 nox 8383E 1 lono 6494E 1  lonox 6449E 1 pres 131 5 pmtt 53 1 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smplf  0 500 ozonf 0 000 pmtv  116    where     pmtv   PMT Voltage  pmtt   PMT Temperature  intt   Internal Temperature  rctt   Reaction Chamber Temperature  convt   NO2 Converter Temperature  smplf   Sample Flow  ozonf   Ozonator Flow  pres   Pressure    C Link Protocol Commands  Datalogging    B 20  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    erec format  srec format  lrec format  These commands report the output format for long and short records  and  dynamic data in various formats such as ASCII without text  ASCII with  text  or binary  The example below shows the output format for long records  is ASCII with text  according to Table B 4     Send   lrec format  Receive   lrec format 1    set erec format format  set lrec format format  set srec format format  These commands set the output format 
171. f the bottom support     4  Replace the front panel board by following previous steps in reverse     Figure 7 21  Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module    LCD Module  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module  Figure 7 21      Equipment Required     LCD module    Philips screwdriver    Ribbon Cables  3     Two Wire Connector    Mounting Studs  2     Bottom Support    LCD Module Screws  2     Front Panel Board    LCD Module    Retaining Screw    CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks  do not to let the liquid crystal contact  your skin or clothes  If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes  wash  it off immediately using soap and water     Servicing  LCD Module Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 45    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Remove the two screws from right side of LCD module  viewed front  front      3  Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two wire connector from the front  panel board     4  Loosen left side retaining screw  viewed from front  and slide the LCD  module out towards the right and rear of the instrument     5  Replace the LCD module by following previous steps in reverse     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Do not remove the panel or frame from the module     The 
172. for long and short records  and  dynamic data  according to Table B 4  The example below sets the long  record output format to ASCII with text     Send   set lrec format 1  Receive   set lrec format 1 ok    erec layout  lrec layout  srec layout  These commands reports the layout  string indicating the data formats  for  data that is sent out in response to the erec  lrec  srec  and related commands  The example below shows a typical response  For details on how to interpret  the strings  see    Record Layout Definition    later in this appendix     Send   lrec layout  Receive   lrec layout  s  s  lx  f  f  f  f  f  f  f  f  f  f  f  f  t D L ffffffffffff  flags no nox hino hinox pres pmtt intt rctt convt smplf ozonf pmtv    Table B 4  Record Output Formats    Format  Output Format    0  ASCII no text    1  ASCII with text    2  binary data    C Link Protocol Commands  Datalogging    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 21    lrec mem size  srec mem size  These commands report the long and short records that can be stored with  the current settings and the number of blocks reserved for long and short  records  To calculate the number of short records per block  add 2 to the  number of records  and then divide by the number of blocks  The example  below shows that 7 blocks were reserved for long records  and the maximum  number of long records that can be stored in memory is 1426     Send   lrec mem size  Receive   lrec mem size 1426 recs  7 blo
173. format  Reports sets erec format  ASCII or binary   B 20    erec layout  Reports current layout of erec data  B 20    flags  Reports 8 hexadecimal digits  or flags  that represent the  status of the ozonator  PMT  gas mode  and alarms  B 11    flow  Reports current measured flow  B 10    format  Reports sets current reply termination format  B 38    gas mode  Reports current mode of sample  zero  or span  B 31    gas unit  Reports sets current gas units  B 31    he  help   Simulates pressing help pushbutton  B 27    high avg time  Reports sets high range averaging time  B 9    high no  Reports NO concentration calculated with high range  coefficients  B 10    high no coef  Reports sets high range NO coefficients  B 25    high no gas  Reports sets high range NO span gas concentration  B 25    high no2  Reports NO2 concentration calculated with high range  coefficients  B 10    high no2 coef  Reports sets high range NO2 coefficients  B 25    high no2 gas  Reports sets high range NO2 span gas concentration  B 25    high nox  Reports NOx concentration calculated with high range  coefficients  B 10    Table B 1  C Link Protocol Commands  continued    Command  Description  Page    C Link Protocol Commands  Commands    B 6  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    high nox coef  Reports sets high range NOx coefficients  B 25    high nox gas  Reports high range NOx span gas concentration  B 25    high range no  Reports selects current NO high range  B 29  
174. ft or right          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to calculate and save the new coefficient based on the  entered span concentration     CALIBRATE NO   NO  79 1  SPAN CONC  00000801      MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Calibration Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 25    Calibrate Pressure  The Calibrate Pressure screen is used to set the calibration pressure     The calibration pressure should be set only when calibrating the  instrument          In the Main Menu  choose Calibration  gt  Calibrate Pressure          Press  to save the current chamber as the new calibration pressure     Zero Span Check  The Zero Span Check menu is available with the zero span valve option  It  is used to program the instrument to perform fully automated zero and span  check or adjustments  Total Duration Hour is the sum of zero  span  and  purge duration minutes  Zero and Span Calibration Reset are toggle items  that change between yes or no when selected  and displayed if auto  calibration is installed          In the Main Menu  choose Calibration  gt  Zero Span Check     CALIBRATE PRESSURE   CUR CAL PRES  35 0 mmHg  CURRENT PRES  33 8 mmHg      SAVE CURRENT PRESSURE    AS CAL PRESSURE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ZERO SPAN CHECK    gt NEXT TIME 01Jan05 12 00  PERIOD HR 24  TOTAL DURATION HR 1 5  ZERO DURATION MIN 30  SPAN DURATION MIN 30  PURGE DURATION MIN 30  ZERO SPAN A
175. gisters for 42i High Level                                                             C 9  Write Coils for 42i High Level                                                                C 10  Operating Status for Model 42i High Level                                              D 7  Error Status for Model 42i High Level                                                      D 7    Tables    xiv  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  xv    About This Manual    This manual provides information about operating  maintaining  and  servicing the analyzer  It also contains important alerts to ensure safe  operation and prevent equipment damage  The manual is organized into the  following chapters and appendices to provide direct access to specific  operation and service information          Chapter 1    Introduction    provides an overview of product features   describes the principles of operation  and lists the specifications          Chapter 2    Installation    describes how to unpack  setup  and startup the  analyzer          Chapter 3    Operation    describes the front panel display  the front panel  pushbuttons  and the menu driven software          Chapter 4    Calibration    provides the procedures for calibrating the  analyzer and describes the required equipment          Chapter 5    Preventive Maintenance    provides maintenance procedures  to ensure reliable and consistent i
176. gnal    11  LD1     LCD Signal    12  LD6     LCD Signal    13  LD2     LCD Signal    14  LD7     LCD Signal    15  LD3     LCD Signal    16  LCD Bias Voltage    17   5V    18  Ground    19  Ground    20  LCD_ONOFF     LCD Signal    21  Keypad Row 2 Input    22  Keypad Row 1 Input    23  Keypad Row 4 Input    24  Keypad Row 3 Input    25  Keypad Col 2 Select    26  Keypad Col 1 Select    27  Keypad Col 4 Select    28  Keypad Col 3 Select    29  Ground    30  Ground    31  Ground    Troubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  6 17    32  Ground    33   24V    34   24V    LCD DATA  J2  1  LFLM_5V     LCD Signal    2  LLP_5V     LCD Signal    3  LCLK_5V     LCD Signal    4  LCD_ONOFF_5V     LCD Signal    5   5V    6  Ground    7  LCD Bias Voltage    8  LD0_5V     LCD Signal    9  LD1_5V     LCD Signal    10  LD2_5V     LCD Signal    11  LD3_5V     LCD Signal    12  LD4_5V     LCD Signal    13  LD5_5V     LCD Signal    14  LD6_5V     LCD Signal    15  LD7_5V     LCD Signal    16  Ground    KEYBOARD  J3  1  Keypad Row 1 Input    2  Keypad Row 2 Input    3  Keypad Row 3 Input    4  Keypad Row 4 Input    5  Keypad Col 1 Select    6  Keypad Col 2 Select    7  Keypad Col 3 Select    8  Keypad Col 4 Select    LCD BACKLIGHT  J4  1  LCD Backlight Voltage 1    2  NC    3  NC    4  LCD Backlight Voltage 2    Table 6 5  Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram  continued    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin 
177. gnal is actually the combination of  electrical offsets  PMT dark current  and trace substances undergoing  chemiluminescence  Before the analyzer sets the NO and NOx readings to  zero  it stores these values as the NO and NOx background corrections   respectively  The NO2 background correction is determined from the NO  and NOx background corrections and is not displayed  NO and NOx  background corrections are typically below 0 030 ppm     CALIBRATION FACTORS   CALIBRATION FACTORS    gt NO BKG 0 0   gt NO BKG 0 0  NOx BKG 0 0  NOx BKG 0 0  NO COEF 1 000  HI NO COEF 1 000  NO2 COEF 1 000  HI NO2COEF 1 000  NOx COEF 1 000  HI NOx COEF 1 000  CAL PRESSURE 35 0 mmHg  LO NO COEF 1 000  RESET USER CAL DEFAULTS  LO NO2 COEF 1 000    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    LO NOx COEF 1 000  CAL PRESSURE 35 0 mmHg  RESET USER CAL DEFAULTS    Operation  Calibration Factors Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 19    The NO and NOx Background screens are used to perform a manual  adjustment of the instruments zero background  Before performing a  background adjustment  allow the analyzer to sample zero air until stable  readings are obtained  The NO channel should be adjusted first  Both the  NO and NOx Background screens operate the same way  Therefore  the  following description of the NO background screen applies to the NOx  background screen as well  The first line of the display shows the current  NO reading  The second line of the d
178. ground and Set NOx Background screens  operate the same way  and the following procedure also applies to the Set  NOx background screen     For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in  these procedures  see the    Operation    chapter     1  Follow the    Pre Calibration    procedure described previously in this  chapter     2  Introduce zero air to the SAMPLE bulkhead and allow the analyzer to  sample zero air until the NO  NOx  and NO2 responses stabilize     3  When the responses stabilize  from the Main Menu choose Calibration   gt  Cal NO Background     4  The Set NO Background screen displays the current NO background  and NO concentration     5  Press  to set the NO background to zero     6  Press  to return to the Run screen     Calibration  Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  4 13    7  Repeat Steps 3 through 6  selecting Cal NOx Background to set the  NOx background to zero     Calibrate Low NO  Use the following procedure to calibrate NO channel to the NO calibration  gas     1  Disconnect the source of zero air from the SAMPLE bulkhead  In its  place  connect a source of NO calibration gas of about 80  of the low  NO full scale range     2  Allow the analyzer to sample the low NO calibration gas until the NO   NO2  and NOx readings stabilize     3  When the responses are stabile  from the Main Menu choose  Calibration  gt  Cal Lo NO Coefficient     4  The L
179. gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Select Content  gt  Select Field  gt  Other Measurements          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to select a new choice     CONCENTRATIONS    gt NONE  NO  lt     NO2  NOx  LO NO  LO NO2  LO NOx    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    HI NO  HI NO2  HI NOx  RANGE  NOX     Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 37    Analog Inputs  The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the output signal  none  or analog input 1 8  that is tied to the selected field item  The selected item  is shown by     lt       after it  Note that at this point  pressing  indicates  that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes  To  change the selected record format and erase record log file data  see     Commit Content    below          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Select Content  gt  Select Field  gt  Analog Inputs          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to select a new choice     Commit Content  The Commit Content screen is used to save the selected output signal that  is tied to the selected field item  For more information about selecting the  analog output signal group choices  see    Select Content    above          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Commit Content     OTHER MEASUREMENTS    gt NONE  INT TEMP  CHAMBER TEMP  COOLER TEMP  NO2 CON
180. gt PROGRAM VERSION  VOLTAGES  TEMPERATURES  PRESSURE  FLOW  ANALOG INPUT READINGS  ANALOG INPUT VOLTAGES    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    DIGITAL INPUTS  RELAY STATES  TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS  INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION  CONTACT INFORMATION    Operation  Diagnostics Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 65    Program Version  The Program Version screen  read only  shows the version number of the  program installed  Prior to contacting the factory with any questions  regarding the instrument  please note the program version number          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Program Version     Voltages  The Voltages menu displays the current diagnostic voltage readings  This  screen enables the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating  voltages without having to use a voltage meter  The I O board is displayed if  the I O expansion board option is installed          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Voltages     Motherboard Voltages  The Motherboard screen  read only  is used to display the current voltage  readings on the motherboard          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Voltages  gt  Motherboard  Voltages     PROGRAM VERSION   PRODUCT  MODEL 42iHL  VERSION  01 00 01 074    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    VOLTAGES    gt MOTHERBOARD  INTERFACE BOARD  I O BOARD    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Diagnostics Menu    3 66  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Interface Board Voltages
181. hoose Cal NOx  Coefficient     8  Verify that the NOx calibration gas concentration is the same as the NO  calibration gas concentration plus any known NO2 impurity     The NOx line of the Calibrate NOx screen displays the current NOx  concentration  The SPAN CONC line of the display is where you enter  the NOx calibration gas concentration     Use  and  to move the cursor left and right and use  and  to increment and decrement each digit  Press  to calibrate the NOx channel to the NOx calibration gas     9  Press  to return to the Run screen  The exact NOx concentration  is calculated from     Where      NOx OUT   diluted NOx concentration at the output manifold  ppm     NO2 IMP   concentration of NO2 impurity in the standard NO  cylinder  ppm    Z     100  x  URL      NO     scale       Response  Recorder  NO  OUT    F     F     F          NO            NO     x  F        NO       D  O  NO    IMP  2  STD  NO  OUT  x    Calibration  Calibration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  4 9    The NOx recorder response will equal     Where     URL   Nominal upper range limit of the NOx channel  ppm    Record the NOx concentration and the analyzer s NOx response     Preparing NO  NOx  and  NO2 Calibration Curves  Use the following procedure to prepare the NO  NOx  and NO2 calibration  curves     1  Generate several additional NO and NOx concentrations by decreasing  FNO or increasing FD     2  For each concentration generated  calculate the exact NO
182. hoose Instrument Controls  gt  PMT Supply          Press  to toggle and set the PMT supply on or off     Auto Manual Mode  The Auto Manual Mode screen allows selection of the automatic mode   NO NOx   NO mode  manual NO   or NOx mode  manual NOx   The  auto mode switches the mode solenoid valve automatically on a 10 second  cycle so that NO  NO2  and NOx concentrations are determined  The  manual NO mode puts the mode solenoid valve into the open position so  that the sample gas bypasses the NO2 to NO converter  Therefore  only the  NO concentration is determined  The manual NOx mode puts the mode  solenoid valve into the closed position so that the sample gas passes through  the NO2 to NO converter  Therefore  only the NOx concentration is  determined  In the manual modes  additional averaging times of 1  2  and 5  seconds are available from the Averaging Time screen          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Auto Manual Mode          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices     OZONATOR   CURRENTLY  OFF  SET TO  ON    TOGGLE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    PMT SUPPLY   CURRENTLY  OFF  SET TO  ON    TOGGLE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 31         Press  to save the new mode state     Datalogging Settings  The Datalogging Settings menu deals with datalogging          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging  Settings     Selec
183. hoose Service  gt  Analog Input Calibration  gt  Select  Channel  gt  Calibrate Zero   Hook up a voltage source of 0 V to the analog  input channel           Press  to save the value     WARNING This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument  service technician     ANALOG INPUT CAL    gt INPUT CHANNEL 1  INPUT CHANNEL 2  INPUT CHANNEL 3  INPUT CHANNEL 4  INPUT CHANNEL 5  INPUT CHANNEL 6  INPUT CHANNEL 7    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ANALOG INPUT CAL    gt CALIBRATE ZERO  CALIBRATE FULL SCALE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 95    Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale  The Analog Input Calibration Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate  the full scale state of the selected analog input          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Analog Input Calibration  gt  Select  Channel  gt  Calibrate Full Scale   Hook up a voltage source of 10 V to  the analog input channel           Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save the value     Ozonator Safety  The Ozonator Safety screen is used to turn the ozonator safety feature on  and off  If the ozonator safety is turned off  the ozonator will always be on   even if there is no flow or the converter is not up to temperature  The  ozonator safety screen is visible only when the instrument is in service  mode  For more information on the service mode  see    Service Mode     earlier in the chapter    
184. ight cable  is required and when the connector is male  a null modem cable is required     Data Format     1200  2400  4800  9600  19200  38400  57600  or 115200 BAUD    8 data bits    1 stop bit    no parity    System Description  I O Components    8 12  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    All responses are terminated with a carriage return  hex 0D     Refer to Table 8 1 for the DB9 connector pin configuration     RS 485 Connection  The instrument uses a four wire RS 485 configuration with automatic flow  control  SD   Refer to Table 8 2 for the DB9 connector pin configuration     Ethernet Connection  An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Ethernet connection supporting  TCP IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing  The IP address may  be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressing  set using a  DHCP server      Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the  serial port     External Accessory  Connector  The external accessory connector is not used     Note This port is used in other models to communicate with smart external  devices that may be mounted hundreds of feet from the analyzer using an  RS 485 electrical interface     Table 8 1  RS 232 DB Connector Pin Configurations    DB9 Pin  Function    2  RX    3  TX    7  RTS    8  CTS    5  Ground    Table 8 2  RS 485 DB Connector Pin Configuration    DB9 Pin  Function    2    receive    8    receive    7    transmit    3    transmit    5  groun
185. included      lt measured value gt  is the concentration value in currently selected gas units  represented as exponential representation with 4 characters mantissa and 2  characters exponent  each with sign     Mantissa  sign and 4 digits  The decimal point is assumed to be after the  first digit and is not transmitted     Exponent  sign and 2 digits     Example      5384000 0  is represented as  5384 06     0 04567  is represented as  4567 02     lt status gt   is formed by  lt  operating status  gt  and  lt  error status  gt  and  separated by a space i e      lt operating status gt  lt SP gt  lt error status gt     Each of the two   lt operating status gt  and  lt error status gt   are formed by two  characters each representing a 2 digit hex number which is one byte  8 Bits   operation status and one byte  8 Bits  error status     These two bytes contain the information about the main operating  conditions of the instrument at that instant  For details on how to interpret  the status bytes refer to Table D   1 and Table D   2 below      lt SFKT gt   is the space provided for future use for special function  it  currently contains a string of ten 0   s i e   lt 0000000000 gt      Geysitech  Bayern Hessen  Protocol  Geysitech Commands    D 6 Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Example     Geysitech Protocol with transmission of three concentrations  Instrument  ID is 1  Operation Status is 03  Error Status is 04      Data Query String   lt 
186. ion is  detected     Each board has a specific address that is used to identify to the firmware  what functions are supported on that board  This address is also used for the  communications between the low level processors and the high level  processor     Every tenth of a second the frequency counters  analog I O  and digital I O  are read and written to by the low level processor  The counters are  accumulated over the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over  that second  The high level processor polls the low level processors once per  second to exchange the measurement and control data     Monitoring Signals  Signals are gathered from the low level processors once per second  and then  processed by the high level processor to produce the final measurement  values  The one second accumulated counts representing the NO NOx are  accumulated and reported for the user specified averaging time  If this  averaging time is greater than ten seconds  the measurement is reported  every 10 seconds  The one second average of the other analog inputs are  reported directly  no additional signal conditioning is performed by the  high level processor      System Description  Software    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  8 5    In auto mode  every ten seconds the NO NOx solenoid switches and the  processor waits three seconds for the reaction chamber to flush and stabilize   After those three seconds  it accumulates the signal counts for seven 
187. ion of NO and NO2  usually  generated via an NIST traceable NO working standard and a GPT  system  to the SAMPLE bulkhead  or SPAN bulkhead for instruments  equipped with the zero span and sample solenoid valve option  on the  rear panel     4  Allow the instrument to sample the calibration gas until a stable reading  is obtained on the NO  NO2  and NOx channels  If the calibration has  changed by more than   10   a new multipoint calibration curve  should be generated     5  When the calibration check has been completed  record the NO  NO2   and NOx values     6  Reconnect the analyzer sample line to the SAMPLE bulkhead     Calibration  Zero and Span Check    4 18  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  5 1    Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance    This chapter describes the periodic maintenance procedures that should be  performed on the instrument to ensure proper operation  Since usage and  environmental conditions vary greatly  you should inspect the components  frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined     This chapter includes the following maintenance information and  replacement procedures             Safety Precautions    on page 5 1            Cleaning the Outside Case    on page 5 2            Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement    on page 5 2            Capillaries Inspection and Replacement    on page 5 2            Thermoelectric Cooler
188. is adjustment should only be performed by an instrument  service technician     SET PMT VOLTAGE   SET PMT  750 0 V  COUNTS  2254      INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    3 84  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Converter Set Temperature  The Converter Set Temperature screen is used to change the converter set  temperature  The converter set temperature reading is updated every  second  The converter set temperature screen is visible only when the  instrument is in service mode  For more information on the service mode   see    Service Mode    earlier in this chapter          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Converter Set Temperature          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric values          Press  to save the new set temperature     Pressure Calibration  The Pressure Calibration menu is used to calibrate the pressure sensor to  zero  span  or restore factory default values  The pressure calibration menu is  visible only when the instrument is in service mode  For more information  on the service mode  see    Service Mode    earlier in this chapter     SINGLE DUAL AUTO RANGE   CURRENTLY  SINGLE  SET TO  DUAL    CHANGE VALUE  SAVE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    WARNING This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument  service technician     SET CONVERTER TEMP   CURRENTLY  625 oC  SET TO  625 oC    INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    Th
189. is command sets the screen   s level of contrast  according to Table B 7   The example below sets the contrast level to 50      Send   set contrast 5  Receive   set contrast 5 ok    C Link Protocol Commands  Hardware Configuration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 33    conv set temp  This command reports the temperature that the NO2 converter is set to   The example below reports that the converter temperature is set to 625   C     Send   conv set temp  Receive   conv set temp 625 deg C    set conv set temp value  This command sets the temperature that the NO2 converter is set to  where  value is an integer representing degrees C  The example below sets the  converter temperature to 625   C     Send   set conv set temp  Receive   set conv set temp 625 deg C ok    date  This command reports the current date  The example below reports the  date as December 1  2004     Send   date  Receive   date 12 01 04    set date mm dd yy  mm   month  dd   day  yy   year    Table B 7  Contrast Levels    Level  Contrast Level    0  0     1  10     2  20     3  30     4  40     5  50     6  60     7  70     8  80     9  90     10  100     C Link Protocol Commands  Hardware Configuration    B 34  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    This command sets the date of the analyzer   s internal clock  The example  below sets the date to March 19  2005     Send   set date 03 19 05  Receive   set date 03 19 05 ok    set default param
190. isher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 47    IP Address  The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  TCP IP Settings  gt  IP Address          Use        and  to move and change the value of  the IP address          Press  to save the new address     Netmask  The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask address          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  TCP IP Settings  gt  Netmask          Use        and  to move and change the value of  the netmask          Press  to save the new address     DHCP   CURRENTLY  OFF  SET TO  ON    TOGGLE VALUE    CYCLE POWER TO CHANGE DHCP  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    IP ADDRESS   CURRENT  192 168 1 15  SET TO  192 168 1 15 1  MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE    SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 48  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Gateway  The Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  TCP IP Settings  gt  Gateway          Use        and  to move and change the value of  the gateway address          Press  to save the new address     Host Name  The host name screen is used to edit the host name  When DHCP is  enabled  this name is reported to the DHCP server          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Commu
191. isplay shows the NO background  correction that is stored in memory  The NO background correction is a  value  expressed in the current gas units  that is subtracted from the NO  reading to produce the NO reading that is displayed     In the example below  the analyzer is displaying  44 ppm of NO while  sampling zero air  A background correction of 0 0 ppm means that 0 ppm is  being subtracted from the NO concentration being displayed  Therefore the  background correction must be increased to  44 ppm in order for the NO  reading to be at 0 ppm  i e   a NO reading of  44 ppm minus a NO  background reading of  44 ppm gives the corrected NO reading of 0 ppm     To set the NO reading in the example below to zero  use  to  increment the NO background correction to  44 ppm  As the NO  background correction is increased  the NO concentration is decreased   Note that at this point  pressing  and  however  has no affect  on the analog outputs or the stored NO background correction of 0 0 ppm   A question mark following both the NO reading and the NO background  correction indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to  implemented changes  To escape this screen without saving any changes   press  to return to the Calibration Factors menu or  to return  to the Run screen  Press  to actually set the NO reading to 0 ppm and  store the new background correction of  44 ppm  Then the question mark  prompt beside the NO reading disappears          In the Main Menu  choose Calibratio
192. ith dry air or nitrogen prior to installing  reaction chamber     8  Re install the measurement bench  Refer to    Removing the  Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel    in this chapter     PMT Cooler    O Ring  2 034     Red Filter    Viton Spacer    Quartz Window    O Ring  2 127     Reaction Chamber Rear    Reaction Chamber Front    Servicing  NO2 to NO Converter Replacement    7 20  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    NO2 to NO Converter  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the converter  Figure 7 10      Equipment Required     NO2 to NO Converter    Wrench  7 16 inch    Wrench  9 16 inch    Wrench  1 2 inch    Wrench  5 8 inch    Screwdriver    Nut driver  1 4 inch    Nut driver  5 16 inch    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Allow converter to cool to room temperature to prevent contact with  heated components     3  Disconnect plumbing at converter inlet and outlet     4  Disconnect thermocouple leads and heater connector from temperature  control board     CAUTION Avoid contact with converter heated components  Allow  converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter  components     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  NO2 to NO Converter Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 
193. ith the instrument     You should have a quality control plan where the frequency and the number  of points required for calibration can be modified on the basis of calibration  and zero and span check data collected over a period of time  Note however   that the EPA requires a minimum of one multipoint calibration per calendar  quarter  Such a quality control program is essential to ascertain the accuracy  and reliability of the air quality data collected and to alert the user if the  accuracy or reliability of the data should become unacceptable  A  compilation of this kind might include items such as dates of calibration   atmospheric conditions  calibration factors  and other pertinent data     Calibration  Zero and Span Check    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  4 17    Use the following procedure to perform a zero and span check     1  Connect the zero gas to the SAMPLE bulkhead in a standard  instrument or to the ZERO bulkhead in a Model 42i High Level  equipped with the zero span and sample solenoid valve option     2  Allow the instrument to sample zero gas until a stable reading is  obtained on the NO  NO2  and NOx channels then record the zero  readings  Unless the zero has changed by more than   0 010 ppm  it is  recommended that the zero not be adjusted  If an adjustment larger  than this is indicated due to a change in zero reading  a new multipoint  calibration curve should be generated     3  Attach a supply of known concentrat
194. ive   set custom 1 range 55 5 ok    range mode  This command reports the current range mode     Send   range mode  Receive   range mode single    set range mode mode  This command sets the current range mode to single  dual  or auto  The  example below sets the range mode to single     Send   set range mode single  Receive   set range mode single ok    8  5 000  7 500    9  C1  C1    10  C2  C2    11  C3  C3    Table B 6  Operating Ranges  continued    Selection  ppm  mg m3    C Link Protocol Commands  Measurement Configuration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 31    gas mode  This command reports the current mode of sample  zero  or span  The  example below reports that the gas mode is sample     Send   gas mode  Receive   gas mode sample    set sample  set zero  set span  These commands set the current gas mode to sample  zero  or span  The  example below sets the instrument to span mode  that is  the instrument is  sampling span gas     Send   set span  Receive   set span ok    gas unit  This command reports the current gas units  ppm or mg m3   The example  reports that the gas unit is set to ppm     Send   gas unit  Receive   gas unit ppm    set gas unit  unit     ppm   mg m3      This command sets the gas units to ppm or mg m3  The example below sets  the gas unit to mg m3     Send   set gas unit mg m3  Receive   set gas unit mg m3 ok    meas mode  This command reports which measurement mode  NO NOx  NO  NOx  is  active  The example
195. l 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 17    Datalogging  clr records  This command will clear all long and short records that have been saved     Send   clear records  Receive   clear records ok    set clr lrecs  set clr srecs  These commands will clear only the long records or only the short records  that have been saved  The example below clears short records     Send   set clr srecs  Receive   set clr srecs ok    list din  list dout  These commands report the current selection for the digital outputs in the  format  Output no Index number variable name active state  The active  state for digital outputs is open or closed  The active state for digital inputs  is high or low     Send   list dout  Receive   list dout  output index variable state  1 35 CONC ALARM open  3 4 UNITS open  4 11 GEN ALARM closed  7 7 NO MODE open  8 8 NOX MODE open    list lrec  list srec  list stream  list sp  These commands report the list of current selections for long record logging  data  short record logging data  streaming data output  or the scratch pad   sp  list  The example below shows the list for streaming data output     Send   list stream  Receive   list stream  field index variable  x x time  1 1 no  2 2 no2  3 3 nox  4 18 intt  5 25 pres  6 26 smplf    C Link Protocol Commands  Datalogging    B 18  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    er xy  lr xy  sr xy    x     0   1      Reply termination format  see    set format format     command   y     0   1 
196. l are restricted to qualified  service representatives     If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer   the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired     CAUTION Carefully observe the instructions in each procedure  Avoid  contact with converter heated components     Allow converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter  components     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component  Figure 7 1   If an  antistatic wrist strap is not available  be sure to touch a grounded metal  object before touching any internal components  When the instrument is  unplugged  the chassis is not at earth ground     Handle all printed circuit boards by the edges     Do Not point the photomultiplier tube at a light source  This can  permanently damage the tube     Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module     The polarizing plate is very fragile  handle it carefully     Do not wipe the polarizing plate with a dry cloth  it may easily scratch the  plate     Do not use alcohol  acetone  MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic  solvents to clean the LCD module  use a soft cloth moistened with a  naphtha cleaning solvent     Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases     Do not shake or jolt the LCD module     Servicing  Firmware Updates    7 4  Model 42i High 
197. l be 0 through 3  The translation list shows the words which  correspond to each input value  the zeroth value appearing first  0   gt  local  1    gt  remote  etc    The selection list shows that only the first two values  in  this case  are to be shown to the user when the button is pressed  The  T   button indicates full translation  input code to string  and user selection  number to output string     C Link Protocol Commands  Record Layout Definition    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 49      xC     This is a line that starts a new column  the  xC or  L        Comp 6 11x off on Tset temp comp  s n     This shows that the bitfield end  the second part of a bitfield specification   is optional  The bitfield will be one bit long  starting in this case at the  eleventh bit      Background 7f 8Bd ddd set o3 bkg  s n     This shows the use of indirect precision specifiers for floating point displays   The background value is taken from the 7th element  and the precision  specifier is taken from the 8th  If the asterisk were not present  it would  indicate instead that 8 digits after the decimal point should be displayed     C Link Protocol Commands  Record Layout Definition    B 50  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Thermo Fisher Scientific  42i High Level Instruction Manual  C 1    Appendix C MODBUS Protocol    This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface  and is supported both ov
198. l components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified  service representatives     If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer   the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired     Servicing  Ambient Temperature Calibration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 37    1  Remove the instrument cover     2  Tape the thermistor  plugged into the measurement interface board  to  a calibrated thermometer  Figure 7 2      Note Since the thermistors are interchangeable to an accuracy of   0 2   C   and have a value of 10K ohms at 25   C  an alternate procedure is to connect  an accurately known 10K resistor to the thermistor input  AMB TEMP  on  the measurement interface board  and enter the temperature reading     A 1   C change corresponds to a   5  change in resistance  thus this  alternative procedure can be quite accurate as a check  however  it clearly is  not NIST traceable     3  From the Main Menu  press  to scroll to Service  gt  press   gt   to scroll to Temperature Calibration  gt  and press       The Calibrate Ambient Temperature screen appears     If the Service Mode is not displayed on the Main Menu  use the  following procedure to display it     a   At the Main Menu  press  to scroll to Instrument Controls  gt 
199. le screen allows the user to calibrate  the full scale state of the selected analog output  The operator must connect  a meter to the output and adjust output until it reads the value shown in the  set output to  field          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Analog Out Calibration  gt  Select  Channel  gt  Calibrate Full Scale          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save the value     ANALOG OUTPUT CAL  ZERO  CONNECT METER TO OUTPUT   SELECTED OUTPUT  V1  SET TO  101      SAVE VALUE INC DEC    SET OUTPUT TO  0 0 V    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ANALOG OUTPUT CAL  SPAN  CONNECT METER TO OUTPUT   SELECTED OUTPUT  V1  SET TO  3697    SAVE VALUE INC DEC  SET OUTPUT TO  10 V  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    3 94  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Analog Input Calibration  The Analog Input Calibration menu is a selection of 8 analog inputs  if the  I O expansion board option is installed  to calibrate  and allows the user to  select the calibration action zero or span  The analog input calibration menu  is visible only when the instrument is in service mode  For more  information on the service mode  see    Service Mode    earlier in the chapter          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Analog Input Calibration     Analog Input Calibrate Zero  The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the zero  state of the selected analog input     In the Main Menu  c
200. log Voltage Output 4    35  Ground    36  Analog Voltage Output 6    37  Ground    SER EN  J7  1  Serial Enable Jumper    2   3 3V    24V IN  J10  1   24V    2  Ground    DIGITAL I O  J14  1   5V    2   24V    3   24V    4  Ground    5  Ground    6  Ground    7  SPI Reset    8  SPI Input    9  SPI Output    10  SPI Board Select    11  SPI Clock    EXT  RS485  J15  1   RS485 to Rear Panel    2   RS485 to Rear Panel    3   5V    4   5V    5   5V    6  Ground    Table 6 3  Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions  continued    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal Descriptions    Troubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  6 11    7  Ground    8  Ground    9  NC    10  NC    11   24V    12   24V    13   24V    14   24V    15   24V    24V MONITOR  J17  1  24V Power Monitor    2  Ground    FRONT PANEL  BD  J18  1  Ground    2  Ground    3  LCLK     LCD Signal    4  Ground    5  Ground    6  LLP     LCD Signal    7  LFLM     LCD Signal    8  LD4     LCD Signal    9  LD0     LCD Signal    10  LD5     LCD Signal    11  LD1     LCD Signal    12  LD6     LCD Signal    13  LD2     LCD Signal    14  LD7     LCD Signal    15  LD3     LCD Signal    16  LCD Bias Voltage    17   5V    18  Ground    19  Ground    20  LCD_ONOFF     LCD Signal    21  Keypad Row 2 Input    Table 6 3  Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions  continued    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal Descriptions    Tr
201. manual are restricted to qualified  service representatives     Servicing  DC Power Supply Replacement    7 28  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    4  At the GAIN 100 screen  use  to increment the D A counts  until the FREQ value matches or is slightly above  within 50 counts  the  value noted in the previous step     5  Press  to store the value     The screen flashes Calculating   Please Wait  and Done   Values  Saved  messages     DC Power Supply  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the DC power supply  Figure 7 14      Equipment Required     DC power supply    Philips screwdriver    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Disconnect all the power supply electrical connections  Note connector  locations to facilitate re connection     3  Loosen the captive screw securing the power supply to the chassis plate  and lift out the power supply     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  Analog Output Testing    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 29    Figure 7 14  Replacing the DC Power Supply    4  Turn the power supply upside down and remove the four retaining  screws securing the power supply to the power supply plate and remove  the power supply     5  To install the DC power supply  follow th
202. ment has been designed to achieve a high level of reliability  In  the event of problems or failure  the troubleshooting guidelines  board level  connection diagrams  connector pin descriptions  and testing procedures  presented in this chapter should be helpful in isolating and identifying  problems     For additional fault location information refer to the    Preventive  Maintenance    chapter in this manual     The service mode in the    Operation    chapter includes parameters and  functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems   The service mode includes some of the same information found in the  Diagnostic menu  however  readings are updated every second in the service  mode compared with every 10 seconds in the Diagnostics menu     The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also be  consulted in the event of problems  See    Service Locations    at the end of  this chapter for contact information  In any correspondence with the  factory  please note both the serial number and program number of the  instrument     This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support  information             Safety Precautions    on page 6 1            Troubleshooting Guides    on page 6 2            Board Level Connection Diagrams    on page 6 6            Connector Pin Descriptions    on page 6 8            Service Locations    on page 6 22    Safety Precautions  Read the safety precautions in the Preface and the    Ser
203. n Factors  gt  NO or NOx  Background          Use  and  to increment or decrement the proposed  background value          Press  to save the new background     Operation  Calibration Factors Menu    3 20  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    NO  NO2  and NOx  Coefficients    The NO  NO2  and NOx span coefficients are usually calculated by the  instrument processor during calibration  The span coefficients are used to  correct the NO  NO2  and NOx readings  The NO and NOx span  coefficients normally have values near 1 000  The NO2 span coefficient  normally has a value between 0 95 and 1 050     The NO  NO2  and NOx Coefficient screens allow the NO  NO2  and  NOx span coefficients to be manually changed while sampling span gas of  known concentration  The NO  NO2  and NOx coefficient screens operate  the same way  Therefore  the following description of the NO coefficient  screen applies to the NO2 and NOx coefficient screens as well     The display shows the current NO concentration reading  The next line of  the display shows the NO span coefficient that is stored in memory and is  being used to correct the NO concentration  Notice that as the span  coefficient value is changed  the current NO concentration reading on the  above line also changes  However  no real changes are made to the value  stored in memory until  is pressed  Only proposed changes  as  indicated by a question mark prompt  are displayed until  is pressed     In dual or auto
204. n for EPA equivalency     When pressure compensation is on  the first line of the display represents  the current pressure in the reaction chamber  When pressure compensation  is off  the first line of the display shows the factory standard pressure of 35  mmHg          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Pressure  Compensation          Press  to toggle and set the pressure compensation on or off     TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION   COMP TEMP  30 0 oC  CURRENTLY  OFF  SET TO  ON    TOGGLE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    PRESSURE COMPENSATION   COMP PRES  35 0 mmHg  CURRENTLY  OFF  SET TO  ON      TOGGLE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 63    Screen Contrast  The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display   Intensities between 0 and 100  in increments of 10 are available  Changing  the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at extreme  temperatures          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Screen Contrast          Use  and  to increment or decrement the screen contrast          Press  to accept a change     Service Mode  The Service Mode screen is used to turn the service mode on or off  The  service mode locks out any remote actions and includes parameters and  functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing the  Model 42i High Level  For more information about the service mode  
205. n is used to change the instrument  communication protocol for serial communications  This does not affect  communications over Ethernet  because the protocols are processed  simultaneously on different ports     In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication Settings   gt  Communication Protocol          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to save the new protocol     INSTRUMENT ID   CURRENTLY  42  SET TO  50    CHANGE VALUE  SAVE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL   CURRENTLY  CLINK  SET TO  STREAMING    CHANGE VALUE  SAVE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 43    Streaming Data Configuration  The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to allow for configuration  of the 18 streaming data output items  streaming interval  current data  format  and current time  The Choose Stream Data submenu displays a list  of the analog signal group choices to choose from  Choices are  Concentrations  Other Measurements  and Analog Inputs  if the I O  expansion board option is installed      Note Add Labels and Prepend Timestamp are toggle items that change  between yes or no when selected          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  Streaming Data Config     Streaming Data Interval  The Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust the streaming data  interval  The following i
206. n outlet of the appropriate voltage and  frequency     Startup  Use the following procedure when starting the instrument     Note It is best to turn the ozonator on and let the instrument run overnight  before calibration in order to obtain the most accurate results     1  Plug the sample pump and the bypass pump  if the bypass flow option  is installed  into an appropriate AC outlet     2  Turn the power ON     3  Allow 90 minutes for the instrument to stabilize     4  Set instrument parameters such as operating ranges and averaging times  to appropriate settings  For more information about instrument  parameters  see the    Operation    chapter     5  Before beginning actual monitoring  perform a multipoint calibration  as described in the    Calibration    chapter     WARNING This instrument is supplied with a three wire grounding cord   DO NOT alter this grounding system under any circumstances     Installation  Startup    2 6  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 1    Chapter 3 Operation    This chapter describes the front panel display  front panel pushbuttons  and  menu driven software             Display    on page 3 2 describes the LCD graphics display             Pushbuttons    on page 3 3 describes the various front panel  pushbuttons and the expected key actions for each             Software Overview    on page 3 4 describes the menu driven software  and submenus  
207. nd 9600  19200  38400  57600  and  115200 are available          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  Baud Rate          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to save the new baud rate     Instrument ID  The Instrument ID screen allows the operator to edit the instrument ID   The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C Link or  MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data  It may be  necessary to edit the ID number if two or more of the same instrument are  connected to one computer over the serial port  Valid Instrument ID  numbers are from 0 to 127  The Model 42i High Level has a default    COMMUNICATION SETTINGS    gt BAUD RATE  INSTRUMENT ID  COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL  STREAMING DATA CONFIG  RS 232 RS 485 SELECTION  TCP IP SETTINGS    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    BAUD RATE   CURRENTLY  9600  SET TO  19200      CHANGE VALUE    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 42  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Instrument ID of 42  For more information about the Instrument ID  see  Appendix B    C Link Protocol Commands    or Appendix C    MODBUS  Protocol             In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  Instrument ID          Use  and  to increment or decrement the ID value          Press  to save the new instrument ID     Communication Protocol  The Communication Protocol scree
208. nges define the concentration range of the  analog outputs  For example  an NO2 range of 0   50 ppm restricts the NO2  analog output to concentrations between 0 and 50 ppm     The display shows the current NO  NO2  or NOx range  The next line of  the display is used to change the range  The range screen is similar for the  single  dual  and auto range modes  The only difference between the screens  are the words    High    and    Low    to indicate which range is displayed  The  example below shows the NO range screen in single mode  For more    GAS UNITS   CURRENTLY  PPM  SET TO  MG M3    AND SET RANGES AND CAL TOX  DEFAULT SETTINGSXXXXXXXXXX    CHANGE VALUE SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Range Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 15    information about the single  dual  and auto range modes  see    Single  Range Mode        Dual Range Mode     and    Auto Range Mode    earlier in this  chapter     Table 3 5 lists the available ranges          In the Main Menu  choose Range  gt  NO  NO2  or NOx Range          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to save the new range     C1  C2  and C3 are custom ranges  For more information about custom  ranges  see    Set Custom Ranges    below     Table 3 5  Operating Ranges    ppm  mg m3    10  20    20  50    50  100    100  200    200  500    500  1 000    1 000  2 000    2 000  5 000    5 000  7 500    C1  C1    C2  C2    C3  C3    NO RANGE   CURRENTLY  50 
209. nication  Settings  gt  TCP IP Settings  gt  Host Name          Use        and  to move the cursor or change  between the edit field and the alpha page          Press  to save the new letter in the alpha table or save the new  alpha page     NETMASK   CURRENT  255 255 255 0  SET TO  255 255 255 000  MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE    SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    DEFAULT GATEWAY   CURRENT  192 168 1 1  SET TO  192 168 1 1  1    MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE    SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 49    I O Configuration  The I O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzer   s I O  system  The analog input configuration is displayed if the I O expansion  board option is installed          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration     Output Relay Settings  The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the 10 analog output  relays available  and allows the user to select the logic state or instrument  parameter for the relay selected     Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned state  occurs to show up on the outputs          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Output Relay Settings     HOST NAME   CURRENT  ISERIES    ISERIES SSSSSS     ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP  OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE  0123456789     SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    I O CONFIGURATION    gt OUTPUT RELAY SETTINGS  DI
210. noid  Note plumbing connections to  facilitate re connection     4  Pull solenoid valve from mounting clip     5  To replace solenoid  follow above in reverse     6  Re install the measurement bench  Refer to    Removing the  Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel    in this chapter     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  Ozonator Assembly Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 23    Figure 7 11  Replacing the Solenoid Valve    Ozonator Assembly  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator assembly  Figure 7 12      Equipment Required     Ozonator assembly    Wrench  5 8 inch    Philips screwdriver    1  Refer to    Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the  Partition Panel    in this chapter to lower the partition panel  then  proceed to the next step below     2  Carefully disconnect the plumbing at the glass inlet and outlet of the  ozonator     Solenoid Valve    Mounting Clip    Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  Ozonator Assembly Replacement    7 24  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    3  Loosen the four captive screw
211. nstrument operation          Chapter 6    Troubleshooting    presents guidelines for diagnosing analyzer  failures  isolating faults  and includes recommended actions for restoring  proper operation          Chapter 7    Servicing    presents safety alerts for technicians working on  the analyzer  step by step instructions for repairing and replacing  components  and a replacement parts list  It also includes contact  information for product support and technical information          Chapter 8    System Description    describes the function and location of  the system components  provides an overview of the software structure   and includes a description of the system electronics and input output  connections          Chapter 9    Optional Equipment    describes the optional equipment that  can be used with this instrument          Appendix A    Warranty    provides a copy of the warranty statement     Preface  Safety    xvi  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific         Appendix B    C Link Protocol Commands    provides a description of the  C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an  analyzer using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger          Appendix C    MODBUS Protocol    provides a description of the  MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485   RTU protocol  as well as TCP IP over Ethernet     Safety  Review the following safety information carefully before using the analyzer   This manual pr
212. nt is warming up and performing self checks   After the warm up period  the Run screen is automatically displayed  The  Run screen is the normal operating screen  It displays the NO  NO2  and  NOx concentrations  depending on operating mode  From the Run screen   the Main Menu can be displayed by pressing    The Main Menu  contains a list of submenus  Each submenu contains related instrument  parameters and or functions  This chapter describes each submenu and  screen in detail  Refer to the appropriate sections for more information     EDIT SOFT KEY PROMPT   CURRENTLY  RANGE    RANGE    ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP  OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE  0123456789     SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 5    Figure 3 3  Flowchart of Menu Driven Software                                                      Operation  Software Overview    3 6  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific     Please wait while booting       Power Up Screen  The Power Up screen is displayed on power up of the Model 42i High  Level  The Self Test is displayed while the internal components are warming  up and diagnostic checks are performed     Run Screen  The Run screen displays the NO  NO2  and NOx concentrations  The  status bar displays time and the status of the remote control interface  and  optional zero span solenoid valves  if installed  The word    SAMPLE    on the  bottom left of the display indicates the analyzer has the span z
213. nt voltage and used to  control that the reaction chamber heaters to maintain a constant  temperature of 50   C  Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event  of broken wires to the thermistor     The converter temperature is measured by a conditioned thermocouple  signal and fed back to the main processor to be used to display and control  the converter temperature  The temperature control board receives control  signals from the main processor software to control the converter heater to  the desired set point  Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event  of broken wires to the thermocouple or processor faults     PMT Power Supply  Assembly  The PMT power supply produces high voltage to operate the photo  multiplier tube used in the measurement system  The output voltage is  adjustable from approximately 600 to 1200 volts under software control     Input Board Assembly  The input board accepts the current signal from the PMT and converts it to  a voltage  which is scaled by a factor of approximately 1  10  or 100  depending on the full scale range of the NO channel  The scaled voltage  signal is converted to a frequency and sent to the microprocessor     The input board includes a test signal that can be activated under software  control  The test signal is injected at the first stage of the input board in  parallel with the PMT input  This allows the input board and the  connection to the processor system to be tested and calibrated without using  the
214. nternal component     Servicing  Measurement Interface Board Replacement    7 42  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Nut driver  3 16 inch    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Remove the I O expansion board  optional   if used  See the    I O  Expansion Board Replacement    procedure in this chapter     3  Remove the digital output board  See the    Digital Output Board  Replacement    procedure in this chapter     4  Unplug all connectors from the motherboard  Note connector locations  to facilitate reconnection     5  Using the nut driver  remove the standoffs securing the board to the rear  panel     6  Pop off the motherboard from motherboard support bracket  and  remove the motherboard     7  To install the motherboard  follow previous steps in reverse     Measurement  Interface Board  Replacement    Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board   Figure 7 20      Equipment Required     Measurement interface board    Philips screwdriver    Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  Front Panel Board Replacement    The
215. nterval times are available  1  2  5  10  20  30  60   90  120  180  240  and 300 seconds          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  Streaming Data Config  gt  Interval          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to save the new streaming data period     STREAMING DATA CONFIG   INTERVAL 10 SEC  ADD LABELS NO  PREPEND TIMESTAMP YES   gt ITEM 1 NO2  ITEM 2 INTT  ITEM 3 PRES  ITEM 4 NONE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CHOOSE STREAM DATA    gt CONCENTRATIONS  OTHER MEASUREMENTS  ANALOG INPUTS    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 44  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Concentrations  The Concentrations screen allows the user to select the output signal that is  tied to the selected streaming data item  The selected item is shown by     lt        after it  In dual or auto range mode     High    or    Low    is displayed to  indicate high or low concentrations  Range  NOx  is visible only in auto  range mode          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  Streaming Data Config  gt  Select Item  gt  Concentrations          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to select a new choice     Other Measurements  The Other Measurements screen allows the user to select the output signal  that is tied to the selected streaming data item  The selected item is shown  by     lt       after it          In 
216. nty Period  to repair or replace  at  Seller s option  defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in  substantial conformance with said published specifications  provided that   a  Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon the discovery of any  defect  which notice shall include the product model and serial number  if  applicable  and details of the warranty claim   b  after Seller   s review  Seller  will provide Buyer with service data and or a Return Material Authorization      RMA      which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and  other product specific handling instructions  and  c  then  if applicable   Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by  Buyer  Replacement parts may be new or refurbished  at the election of  Seller  All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller  Shipment to  Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with  the Delivery provisions of the Seller   s Terms and Conditions of Sale   Consumables  including but not limited to lamps  fuses  batteries  bulbs and  other such expendable items  are expressly excluded from the warranty  under this warranty     Notwithstanding the foregoing  Products supplied by Seller that are  obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are  not warranted by Seller  but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty  rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer  or
217. o  Receive   range no 0  2000E 2 ppm    set range no selection  set range no2 selection  set range nox selection  set high range no selection  set high range no2 selection  set high range nox selection  set low range no selection  set low range no2 selection  set low range nox selection  These commands select the NO  NO2  and NOx full scale ranges   according to Table B 6  The example below sets the NOx full scale to 2 000  ppm     Send   set range nox 7  Receive   set range nox 7 ok    Table B 6  Operating Ranges    Selection  ppm  mg m3    0  10  20    1  20  50    2  50  100    3  100  200    4  200  500    5  500  1 000    6  1 000  2 000    7  2 000  5 000    C Link Protocol Commands  Measurement Configuration    B 30  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    custom range  range     1   2   3      This command reports the user defined value of custom range 1  2  or 3   The example below reports that custom range 1 is defined to 55 0 ppm     Send   custom 1  Receive   custom 1 5500E 2 ppm    set custom range value  set custom 1 value  set custom 2 value  set custom 3 value  set custom 1 range value  set custom 2 range value  set custom 3 range value  These commands are used to set the maximum concentration for any of the  three custom ranges 1  2  or 3 to range value  where value is a floating point  number representing concentration in ppm or mg m3  The example below  sets the custom 1 range to 55 5 ppm     Send   set custom 1 range 55 5  Rece
218. o NO field displays the current NO concentration     The Lo Span Conc field is where you enter the low NO calibration gas  concentration     Use  to move the cursor left and right and use  to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor     5  Press  to calculate and save the new low NO coefficient based on  the entered span concentration     Calibrate Low NOx  Use the following procedure to calibrate the NOx channel to the NOx  calibration gas     1  Press  to return to the Calibration menu and choose Cal Lo NOx  Coefficient     2  Verify that the low NOx calibration gas concentration is the same as the  low NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO2 impurity     The Lo NOx field displays the current NOx concentration  The Lo  Span Conc field is where you enter the low NOx calibration gas  concentration     Calibration  Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode    4 14  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Use  to move the cursor left and right and use  to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor     3  Press  to calculate and save the new low NOx coefficient based on  the entered span concentration     4  Press  to return to the Run screen     Calibrate Low NO2  Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO2 channel to the NO2  calibration gas     1  Adjust the O3 generator in the GPT system to generate sufficient O3 to  produce a decrease in the low NO concentration equivalent to about  80  of
219. ocessor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument  The  motherboard receives operator inputs from the front panel mounted  function key panel and or over I O connections on the rear panel and sends  commands to the other boards to control the functions of the instrument  and to collect measurement and diagnostic information  The motherboard  outputs instrument status and measurement data to the front panel  mounted graphics display and to the rear panel I O  The motherboard also  contains I O circuitry and the associated connector to monitor external  digital status lines and to output analog voltages that represent the  measurement data  Connectors located on the motherboard include     External Connectors  External connectors include          External Accessory         RS 232 485 Communications  two connectors          Ethernet Communications         I O connector with Power Fail Relay  16 Digital Inputs  and 6 Analog  Voltage Outputs     Internal Connectors  Internal connectors include          Function key panel and Display         Measurement Interface Board Data         I O Expansion Board Data         Digital Output Board    System Description  Electronics    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  8 7         AC distribution    Measurement Interface  Board  The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all  measurement electronics in the instrument  It contains power supplies and  interface circuitry fo
220. odel 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    These commands set the NO  NO2  and NOx concentrations alarm  minimum value  where value is set to either floor or ceiling  according to  Table B 3  The example below sets the NO concentration minimum alarm  trigger to ceiling     Send   set alarm trig conc no 1  Receive   set alarm trig conc no 1 ok    Diagnostics  diag volt mb  This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the  motherboard  The sequence of voltages is  Positive 24  positive 15  positive  5  positive 3 3  and negative 3 3  Each voltage value is separated by a space     Send   diag volt mb  Receive   diag volt mb 24 1 14 9 4 9 3 2  3 2    diag volt mib  This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the  measurement interface board  The sequence of voltages is  Positive 24   positive 15  negative 15  positive 5  positive 3 3  and positive 15  Each  voltage value is separated by a space     Send   diag volt mib  Receive   diag volt mib 24 1 14 9  14 9 4 9 3 2 14 9    diag volt iob  This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the I O  expansion board  The sequence of voltages is  Positive 24  positive 5   positive 3 3  and negative 3 3  Each voltage value is separated by a space     Send   diag volt iob  Receive   diag volt iob 24 1 4 9 3 2  3 2    Table B 3  Alarm Trigger Values    Value  Alarm Trigger    0  Floor    1  Ceiling    C Link Protocol Commands  Datalogging    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Mode
221. oefficient  B 24    cal high nox coef  Sets auto calibrates high range NOx coefficient  B 24    cal low no coef  Sets auto calibrates low range NO coefficient  B 24    cal low no2 coef  Sets auto calibrates low range NO2 coefficient  B 24    cal low nox coef  Sets auto calibrates low range NOx coefficient  B 24    cal no bkg  Sets auto calibrates NO background  B 24    cal no coef  Sets auto calibrates NO coefficient  B 24    cal no2 coef  Sets auto calibrates NO2 coefficient  B 24    cal nox bkg  Sets auto calibrates NOx background  B 24    cal nox coef  Sets auto calibrates NOx coefficient  B 24    cal pres  Sets current measured pressure as pressure during calibration   for pressure compensation   B 27    clr lrecs  Clears away only long records that have been saved  B 17    clr records  Clears away all logging records that have been saved  B 17    clr srecs  Clears away only short records that have been saved  B 17    contrast  Reports sets current screen contrast  B 32    conv set temp  Reports sets temperature setpoint for NO2 converter  B 33    conv temp  Reports current NO2 converter temperature  B 10    cooler temp  Reports temperature of PMT cooler  same as PMT temperature   B 10    copy lrec to sp  Sets copies current lrec selection into the scratch pad  B 22    copy sp to lrec  Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into lrec list  B 22    copy sp to srec  Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into srec list  B 22    copy sp to stream  Sets copies c
222. ommand that does  not begin with its instrument identification number  If the instrument ID is  set to 0  then this byte is not required  For more information on changing  Instrument ID  see Chapter 3     Operation        Commands  The analyzer must be in the remote mode in order to change instrument  parameters via remote  However  the command    set mode remote    can be  sent to the analyzer to put it in the remote mode  Report commands   commands that don   t begin with    set     can be issued either in the remote or  local mode  For information on changing modes  see Chapter 3      Operation        The commands can be sent in either uppercase or lowercase characters  Each  command must begin with the proper instrument identification number   ASCII  character  The command in the example below begins with the  ASCII character code 170 decimal  which directs the command to the  Model 42i  High Level and is terminated by a carriage return    CR     ASCII  character code 13 decimal      If an incorrect command is sent  a    bad command    message will be received   The example below sends the incorrect command    set unit ppm    instead of  the correct command    set gas unit ppm        Send   set unit ppm  Receive   set unit ppm bad cmd    The    save    and    set save params    commands stores parameters in FLASH  It  is important that each time instrument parameters are changed  that this  command be sent  If changes are not saved  they will be lost in the event of a  po
223. onnector Pin Descriptions    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  6 15    2  AC NEUT    3  AC Ground    FAN 1  PJ4  1   24V    2  Ground    FAN 2  PJ5  1   24V    2  Ground    AC IN  PJ6  1  AC HOT    2  AC NEUT    3  AC Ground    COOLER  PJ7  1  Cooler Thermistor    2  Ground    3   15V_PWR    4  Cooler On Off Control    AC TEMP  PJ8  1  AC HOT    2  AC NEUT    3  AC Ground    NO NOX SOL   PJ9  1   24V    2  NO NOX Solenoid Control    SAMPLE SOL   PJ10  1   24V    2  Sample Solenoid Control    Z S SOL   PJ11  1   24V    2  Zero Span Solenoid Control    SPARE1 SOL   PJ12  1   24V    2  Spare 1 Solenoid Control    SPARE2 SOL   PJ13  1   24V    2  Spare 2 Solenoid Control    PERM OVEN  THERM  POJ1  1  Perm Oven Gas Thermistor    2  Ground    PERM OVEN  POJ3  1  Perm Oven Heater On Off    2   15V_PWR    3  Perm Oven Thermistor    4  Ground    Table 6 4  Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions  continued    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal  Description    Troubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    6 16  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Table 6 5  Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal  Description    MOTHER  BOARD  J1  1  Ground    2  Ground    3  LCLK     LCD Signal    4  Ground    5  Ground    6  LLP     LCD Signal    7  LFLM     LCD Signal    8  LD4     LCD Signal    9  LD0     LCD Signal    10  LD5     LCD Si
224. oubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    6 12  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    22  Keypad Row 1 Input    23  Keypad Row 4 Input    24  Keypad Row 3 Input    25  Keypad Col 2 Select    26  Keypad Col 1 Select    27  Keypad Col 4 Select    28  Keypad Col 3 Select    29  Ground    30  Ground    31  Ground    32  Ground    33   24V    34   24V    RS232 RS485 A  P1 A  1  NC    2  Serial Port 1 RX   RS485 IN     3  Serial Port 1 TX   RS485 OUT     4  NC    5  Ground    6  NC    7  Serial Port 1 RTS   RS485 OUT     8  Serial Port 1 CTS   RS485 IN     9  NC    RS232 RS485 B  P1 B  1  NC    2  Serial Port 2 RX   RS485 IN     3  Serial Port 2 TX   RS485 OUT     4  NC    5  Ground    6  NC    7  Serial Port 2 RTS   RS485 OUT     8  Serial Port 2 CTS   RS485 IN     9  NC    AC IN  PJ1  1  AC HOT    2  AC NEUT    Table 6 3  Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions  continued    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal Descriptions    Troubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  6 13    3  AC Ground    AC 24VPWR  PJ2  1  AC HOT    2  AC NEUT    3  AC Ground    AC INTF BD  PJ3  1  AC HOT    2  AC NEUT    3  AC Ground    Table 6 4  Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal  Description    DATA  IPJ8  1  Ground    2   RS485 from Motherboard    3   RS485 from Motherboard    PRES  MJ3  1  Pressure Sen
225. ovides specific information on how to operate the analyzer   however if the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by the  manufacturer  the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired     Safety and Equipment  Damage Alerts  This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety  hazards and risks of equipment damage  Refer to the following types of  alerts you may see and the actual alerts that appear in this manual     Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions    Alert  Description    DANGER  A hazard is present that will result in death or serious  personal injury if the warning is ignored     WARNING  A hazard is present or an unsafe practice can result in  serious personal injury if the warning is ignored     CAUTION  The hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to  moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored     Equipment Damage  The hazard or unsafe practice could result in property  damage if the warning is ignored     Preface  Safety    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  xvii    Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts in this Manual    Alert  Description    WARNING  If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by  the manufacturer  the protection provided by the  equipment may be impaired     The service procedures in this manual are restricted to  qualified service personnel only     The Model 42i High Level is supplied with a three wire  grounding cord  Under no circumstances
226. pansion board option is installed  to  calibrate  and allows the user to select the calibration action zero or span   The analog output calibration menu is visible only when the instrument is  in service mode  For more information on the service mode  see    Service  Mode    earlier in the chapter          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Analog Out Calibration     CALIBRATE AMBIENT TEMP   CURRENTLY  28 6 oC  SET TO  25 0 oC      MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    WARNING This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument  service technician     ANALOG OUTPUT CAL    gt VOLTAGE CHANNEL 1  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 2  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 3  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 4  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 5  VOLTAGE CHANNEL 6  CURRENT CHANNEL 1    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ANALOG OUTPUT CAL    gt CALIBRATE ZERO  CALIBRATE FULL SCALE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Service Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 93    Analog Output Calibrate Zero  The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the  zero state of the selected analog output  The operator must connect a meter  to the output and adjust the output until it reads 0 0 V on the meter          In the Main Menu  choose Service  gt  Analog Out Calibration  gt  Select  Channel  gt  Calibrate Zero          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to save the value     Analog Output Calibrate  Full Scale  The Analog Output Calibrate Full Sca
227. particulate matter before passing through the  ozonator     NO2 to NO Converter  The Model 42i High Level includes a stainless steel NO2 to NO converter  as standard equipment     I O Expansion Board  Assembly  For a detailed description  refer to the    System Description    chapter     Terminal Block and  Cable Kits  The terminal block and cable kit provides a convenient way to connect  devices to the analyzer  The kit breaks out the signals on the rear panel  connector to individual numbered terminals     Two types of terminal block and cable kits are available  One kit is for the  DB37 connectors and can be used for either the analog output connector or  the relay output connector  The other kit is for the DB25 connector and can  be used for the optional I O expansion board  The parts available in these  kits can also be purchased separately     Each kit consists of          one six foot cable         one terminal block         one snap track    Note Supporting all of the connections on units with the optional I O  expansion board requires     two DB37 kits    one DB25 kit    Optional Equipment  Mounting Options    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  9 5    Mounting Options  The analyzer can be installed in the configurations described in Table 9 1  and shown in Figure 9 3 through Figure 9 6     Figure 9 3  Rack Mount Option Assembly    Table 9 1  Mounting Options    Mounting Type  Description    Bench  Positioned on bench  includes mounting
228. placing the I O Expansion Board  Optional                      7 40  Rear Panel Board Connectors                                                 7 40  Replacing the Measurement Interface Board                          7 43  Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module         7 44  Hardware Components                                                            8 2  Zero Span Option Flow Diagram                                            9 2  Bypass Flow Option Flow Schematic                                       9 3  Rack Mount Option Assembly                                                 9 5    Figures    xii  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Bench Mounting                                                                      9 6  EIA Rack Mounting                                                                 9 7  Retrofit Rack Mounting                                                           9 8  Flag Status                                                                              B 12    Tables    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  xiii    Tables    Model 42i High Level Specifications                                                          1 3  Front Panel Pushbuttons                                                                            3 3  Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode                                         3 9  Default Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode                   
229. pment Required     Allen Wrench  9 64 inch    Wrench  7 16 inch    Wrench  9 16 inch    1  Remove PMT cooler as described in    PMT Cooler and Reaction  Chamber Replacement    in this chapter     2  Disconnect the 1 8 inch line at the mixing tee on the rear of the  reaction chamber  This line is connected to the left 1 8 inch elbow at  the bottom of the front of the reaction chamber     3  Disconnect 1 4 inch fitting from the exhaust elbow on the front of the  reaction chamber     4  Disconnect 1 8 inch fitting from 1 8 inch elbow at the bottom of the  front of the reaction chamber     5  Remove the three socket head screws fastening front of reaction  chamber to rear  This exposes the inner surfaces of both sections of the    Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 19    reaction chamber and the quartz window  To clean these surfaces use  cotton swabs and methanol     Figure 7 9  Cleaning or Removing the Reaction Chamber    6  To continue removing rear of reaction chamber remove the three socket  head screws holding it to cooler  being careful to keep quartz window  and red filter in cooler body     7  To reinstall reaction chamber  follow previous steps in reverse  making  sure to backfill the cooler w
230. polarizing plate is very fragile  handle it carefully     Do not wipe the polarizing plate with a dry cloth  it may easily scratch the  plate     Do not use alcohol  acetone  MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic  solvents to clean the module  use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha  cleaning solvent     Do not place the module near organic solvents or corrosive gases     Do not shake or jolt the module     Servicing  Service Locations    7 46  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Service Locations  For additional assistance  service is available from exclusive distributors  worldwide  Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support  and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi     1 866 282 0430 Toll Free    1 508 520 0430 International    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  8 1    Chapter 8 System Description    This chapter describes the function and location of the system components   provides an overview of the software structure  and includes a description of  the system electronics and input output connections and functions             Hardware    on page 8 1 describes the analyzer components             Software    on page 8 4 provides an overview of the software  organization and detailed information on the software tasks             Electronics    on page 8 6 describes the system boards  assemblies  and  connectors             I O Components    on page 8 9 describes
231. ports sets temperature compensation on or off  B 32    time  Reports sets current time  24 hour time   B 35    up  Simulates pressing up pushbutton  B 27    zero  Sets zero span valves to zero mode  B 31    Table B 1  C Link Protocol Commands  continued    Command  Description  Page    C Link Protocol Commands  Measurements    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 9    Measurements  avg time  high avg time  low avg time  These commands report the averaging time in seconds when operating in  single range  or averaging time used with the high and low ranges when  operating in dual or auto range mode  The example below shows that the  averaging time is 300 seconds  according to Table B 2     Send   avg time  Receive   avg time 11  300 sec    set avg time selection  set high avg time selection  set low avg time selection  These commands set the averaging time  high and low averaging times   according to Table B 2  The example below sets the low range averaging  time to 120 seconds     Send   set low avg time 8  Receive   set low avg time 8 ok    Table B 2  Averaging Times    Selection  Time  NO Measure Mode   NOx Measure Mode    Time  NO NOx Measure  Mode    0  1 seconds    1  2    2  5    3  10  10 seconds    4  20  20    5  30  30    6  60  60    7  90  90    8  120  120    9  180  180    10  240  240    11  300  300    C Link Protocol Commands  Measurements    B 10  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    no  no2  nox
232. r sensors and control devices in the measurement  system  It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals  from the motherboard     Measurement Interface Board  Connectors  Connectors located on the measurement interface board include          Data communication with the motherboard         24V and 120VAC power supply inputs         Fans and solenoid outputs         Cooler control         120VAC outputs for the pump and temperature control board         Ozonator         Pressure sensor         Ambient temperature sensor         Temperature control board         PMT high voltage supply         Measurement input board         Permeation oven option    Pressure Sensor Assembly  The pressure sensor assembly consists of a board containing an  instrumentation amplifier and a pressure transducer with a gas input fitting   The pressure transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure  difference between the sample gas pressure and ambient air pressure     Temperature Control  Board  The temperature control board regulates and sets the temperature of the  reaction chamber and converter     System Description  Electronics    8 8  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    The reaction chamber temperature is measured with a thermistor  The  voltage across the thermistor is fed to the main processor for use in  calculating and displaying the reaction chamber temperature  The voltage  across the thermistor is also compared to a set poi
233. r temperature alarm minimum value is 47 0   C     Send   alarm chamber temp min  Receive   alarm chamber temp min 47 0 deg C    set alarm chamber temp min value  set alarm chamber temp max value  These commands set the chamber temperature alarm minimum and  maximum values to value  where value is a floating point number  representing chamber temperature alarm limits in degrees C  The example  below sets the chamber temperature alarm maximum value to 50 0   C     C Link Protocol Commands  Alarms    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 13    Send   set alarm chamber temp max 50 0  Receive   set alarm chamber temp max 50 0 ok    alarm conc no min  alarm conc no2 min  alarm conc nox min  alarm conc no max  alarm conc no2 max  alarm conc nox max  These commands report the NO  NO2  and NOx concentrations alarm  minimum and maximum value current setting  The example below reports  that the NO concentration minimum is 5 2 ppm     Send   alarm conc no min  Receive   alarm conc no min 5 2 ppm    set alarm conc no min value  set alarm conc no2 min value  set alarm conc nox min value  set alarm conc no max value  set alarm conc no2 max value  set alarm conc nox max value  These commands set the NO  NO2  and NOx concentrations alarm  minimum and maximum value to value  where value is a floating point  representation of the concentration alarm limits  Values must be in the units  that are currently set for use  The example below sets the NO concentration  al
234. rase Log is used to erase all saved data for the selected record type  not  all short records and long records           In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Erase Log          Press  to erase all data          Press  to confirm erasure     DATE AND TIME   20 JUN 2005 10 00  CHG DAYS  SET CURSOR TO MONTHS  ACCEPT AS SHOWN    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    time date flags  10 01 06 20 05 FC0088900  10 02 06 20 05 FC0088900  10 03 06 20 05 FC0088900  10 04 06 20 05 FC0088900  PGUP DN  PAN L R    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 35    Select Content  The Select Content submenu displays a list of 32 record fields to use and a  submenu list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from   Choices are Concentrations  Other Measurements  and Analog Inputs  if  the I O expansion board is installed   This is a temporary list of items for  the selected record type that must be committed via the datalogging menu  before the changes will apply  Note that committing any changes to this list  will erase all currently logged data  as the format of the stored data is  changed          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Select Content     ERASE LREC LOG FILE DATA   ERASE LREC LOG FILE DATA     ERASE  ERASE    ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO x  PRESS  TO CONFIRM ERASURE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM 
235. reading is added to the corrected NO reading to  yield a fully corrected NOx value     Output Communication  The front panel display  serial and Ethernet data ports  and analog outputs  are the means of communicating the results of the above calculations  The  front panel display presents the NO  NO2  and NOx concentrations  simultaneously  The display is updated every 1 10 seconds  depending on  the averaging time     The analog output ranges are user selectable via software  The analog  outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range  The defaults are  calculated by dividing the data values by the full scale range for each of the  three parameters and then multiplying each result by the user selected  output range  Negative concentrations can be represented as long as they are  within  5  of full scale  The zero and span values may be set by the user to  any desired value     System Description  Electronics    8 6  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Electronics  All electronics operate from a universal switching supply  which is capable of  auto sensing the input voltage and working over the entire operating range     Internal pumps and heaters all operate on 110VAC  An optional  transformer is required if operating on the 210 250VAC or 90 110VAC  ranges     An on off switch controls all power to the instrument  and is accessible on  the front panel     Motherboard  The motherboard contains the main processor  power supplies  a  sub pr
236. rement the numeric character at the cursor     3  Press  to calculate and save the new high NO coefficient based on  the entered span concentration     Calibrate High NOx  Use the following procedure to calibrate the NOx channel to the NOx  calibration gas     1  Press  to return to the Calibration menu  and choose Cal Hi  NOx Coefficient     2  Verify that the high NOx calibration gas concentration is the same as  the high NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO2  impurity     Use  to move the cursor left and right and use  to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor     3  Press  to calculate and save the new high NOx coefficient based  on the entered span concentration     4  Press  to return to the Run screen     Calibrate High NO2  Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO2 channel to the NO2  calibration gas     1  Adjust the O3 generator in the GPT system to generate sufficient O3 to  produce a decrease in the high NO concentration equivalent to about  80  of the URL of the high NO2 range  The decrease must not exceed  90  of the high NO concentration determined in the    Calibrate High  NOx    procedure     Calibration  Zero and Span Check    4 16  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    2  From the Main Menu  choose Calibration  gt  Cal Hi NO2 Coefficient     The Hi NO2 field displays the current NO2 concentration  The Hi  Span Conc field is where you enter the high NO2 calibration gas  concentration   
237. ries Inspection  and Replacement  The capillaries normally only require inspection when instrument  performance indicates that there may be a flow problem     Use the following procedure to inspect and replace the capillaries  This  procedure can be used to check any or all of the capillaries     1  Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord     2  Remove the instrument cover     3  Locate the capillaries  See Figure 5 1 and Figure 7 2     Equipment Damage Do Not use solvents or other cleaning products to  clean the outside case     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component  For more information  about appropriate safety precautions  see the    Servicing    chapter     Preventive Maintenance  Capillaries Inspection and Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  5 3    Figure 5 1  Inspecting and Replacing the Capillaries    4  Remove the Cajon   fitting s  from the reaction chamber body using a  5 8 inch wrench     5  Remove the glass capillaries and O ring  Inspect O ring for cuts or  abrasion  and replace as necessary     6  Check capillary for particulate deposits  Clean or replace as necessary     7  Replace capillary in reaction chamber body  making sure the O ring is  around the capillary before inserting it into the body     8  Replace Cajon   fitting  Note that the Cajon   fi
238. ring the multipoint calibration     Calibration in Dual  Range and Auto  Range Mode    The dual auto range calibration feature is used to calibrate the analyzer at  two different span levels  as opposed to a single span level in the standard  mode  generating a    tailored multi point    calibration curve stored in the  analyzer s memory  This feature may be used     Z     100  x  URL     NO        scale       Response  Recorder  NO  OUT  2    2    Calibration  Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode    4 12  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific         When widely different gas levels are being monitored  such as a factor of  10 or greater apart         If precision and span levels are being introduced using separate tanks         If more than one multi component cylinder is being used to calibrate  the instrument    Properly designed chemiluminescence analyzers are inherently linear over a  wide dynamic range  and under normal USEPA compliance situations this  feature is not required  Dual calibration may be used for span levels less than  a factor of 10 apart  however if this is done to correct for a significant  non linearity  it may mask the problems causing the effect  such as  bad  calibration cylinder  leaks in sampling lines  or low ozonator output     Use the following procedures to calibrate the analyzer in dual or auto range  mode     Use the following procedure to set NO and NOx background readings to  zero  Both the Set NO Back
239. rmat 01 ok    where xxxx   4 hexadecimal digits that represent the sum of all the  characters  bytes  in the message    host name  This command reports the host name string     Send   host name  Receive   host name ISERIES    set host name string  This command sets the host name string  where string is 1 13 alphanumeric  characters     Send   set host name analyzer01  Receive   set host name analyzer01 ok    Table B 8  Reply Termination Formats    Format  Reply Termination    00   lt CR gt     01   lt NL gt  sum xxxx  lt CR gt     C Link Protocol Commands  Communications Configuration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 39    instr name  This command reports the instrument name     Send   instr name  Receive   instr name  NO NO2 NOx Analyzer  NO NO2 NOx Analyzer    instrument id  This command reports the instrument id     Send   instrument id  Receive   instrument id 42    set instrument id value  This command sets the instrument id to value  where value is a decimal  number between 0 and 127 inclusive     Note sending this command via RS 232 or RS 485 will require the host to  use the new id for subsequent commands     Send   set instrument id 50  Receive   set instrument id 50 ok    mode  This command reports what operating mode the instrument is in  local   service  or remote  The example below shows that the instrument is in the  remote mode     Send   mode  Receive   mode remote    set mode local  set mode remote  These commands set th
240. rmo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 43    1  Refer to    Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the  Partition Panel    in this chapter to lower the partition panel  then  proceed to the next step below     2  Unplug all connectors  Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate  reconnection     3  Pop off the measurement interface board from the four mounting studs  and remove the board     4  To install the measurement interface board  follow previous steps in  reverse     5  Re install the measurement bench  Refer to    Removing the  Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel    in this chapter     Figure 7 20  Replacing the Measurement Interface Board    Front Panel Board  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board  Figure 7 21      Equipment Required          Front panel board    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     Measurement Interface Board    Mounting Studs  4     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  LCD Module Replacement    7 44  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    2  Remove the three ribbon cables and the two wire connector from the  front panel board     3  Pop off the board from the two top mounting studs and remove the  board by lifting it up and of
241. ro     e   Record the stable zero air responses as ZNO  ZNOX  and ZNO2   recorder response  percent scale      3  Adjust the NO flow from the standard NO cylinder to generate a NO  concentration of about 80  of the upper range limit  URL  of the NO  range  The exact NO concentration is calculated from     Where           NO OUT   Diluted NO concentration at the output manifold   ppm         NOSTD   No feed concentration         FNO   No flow         FO   Ozone flow         FD   Dilution flow    4  Allow the analyzer to sample the NO calibration gas until the NO   NO2 and NOx readings stabilize     5  When the responses stabilize  from the Main Menu  choose Calibration   gt  Cal NO Coefficient     The NO line of the Calibrate NO screen displays the current NO  concentration  The SPAN CONC line of the display is where you enter  the NO calibration gas concentration     Use  and  to move the cursor left and right and use  and  to increment and decrement each digit     6  Press  to calculate and save the new NO coefficient based on the  entered span concentration     F     F     F  NO  x  F         NO  D  O  NO    STD  NO  OUT    Calibration  Calibration    4 8  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    The NO recorder response will equal     Where     URL   Nominal upper range limit of the NO channel  ppm    Record the  NO OUT concentration and the NO response as indicated  by the recorder response     7  Press  to return to the Calibration menu  and c
242. s  This command sets all the parameters to their default values  This does not  affect the factory calibrated parameters     Send   set default params  Receive   set default params ok    ozonator  This command reports the ozonator on or off  The example below reports  that the ozonator is on     Send   ozonator  Receive   ozonator on    set ozonator onoff  These commands set the ozonator on or off  The example below sets the  ozonator off     Send   set ozonator off  Receive   set ozonator off ok    ozonator flow  This command reports the current ozonator flow  The example below  reports that the current ozonator flow is 0 050 LPM     Send   ozonator flow  Receive   ozonator flow 0 050 l m    ozonator safety  This command reports the status of the ozonator safety on or off  The  example below reports that the ozonator safety is on     Send   ozonator safety  Receive   ozonator safety on    set ozonator safety onoff  These commands set the ozonator safety on or off  The example below sets  the ozonator off     Send   set ozonator safety off  Receive   set ozonator safety off ok    C Link Protocol Commands  Hardware Configuration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 35    ozonator status  This command reports the status of the ozonator and safety  The example  below reports that the ozonator is off     Send   ozonator status  Receive   ozonator status off    pmt status  This command reports the status of the PMT on or off  The example below  r
243. s securing the ozonator bracket to the floor  plate     Figure 7 12  Replacing the Ozonator Assembly    4  Remove the two screws securing the ozonator to the ozonator bracket     5  Unplug the ozonator from the ozonator transformer by lifting the  ozonator straight up     6  To install the ozonator  follow the previous steps in reverse     7  Re install the measurement bench  Refer to    Removing the  Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel    in this chapter     Ozonator Assembly   Top View    Ozonator Assembly   Side View    Captive Screws  4     Ozonator Bracket Screws  2     Ozonator    Ozonator Transformer  Screws  4   Ozonator Transformer    Servicing  Ozonator Transformer Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 25    Ozonator Transformer  Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator transformer   Figure 7 12      Equipment Required     Ozonator transformer    Philips screwdriver    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Remove the ozonator assembly as described in    Ozonator Assembly  Replacement        3  Disconnect the plug connecting the ozonator transformer to the  measurement interface board  OZONATOR connector      4  Remove the four screws holding the ozonator transformer to the  ozonator bracket and remove the ozonator transformer     5  To install the ozonator transformer  follow the previous steps in reverse     6  Re install the measurement bench  
244. seconds  before again switching the solenoid     Measurement  Calculations  The calculation of the NO and NOx concentrations is lengthy and uses the  high level processor to provide the most accurate readings  The calculation  begins by subtracting the appropriate electronic offset from the  seven second count accumulation  Following this correction  the raw  accumulated counts are scaled according to the gain setting of the input  board     Next  the uncorrected NO and NOx values are determined according to a  unique averaging algorithm which minimizes errors resulting from rapidly  changing gas concentrations  This algorithm results in NO and NOx values  which are stored in RAM in a circular buffer that holds all the ten second  data from the previous five minutes  This data is averaged over the selected  time interval  which can be any multiple of ten between 10 and 300  the  manual modes have additional intervals of 1  2  and 5 seconds      The background values for NO and NOx  which are corrected for  temperature  are subtracted from their respective averages  The NO reading  is corrected by the stored span factor and by the temperature factor  The  NOx reading is partially corrected by the span factor  temperature factor   and balance factor  The corrected NO value is subtracted from the partially  corrected NOx value to yield an uncorrected NO2 value  The NO2 value is  then corrected for converter efficiency to give a corrected NO2 reading   Finally  the corrected NO2 
245. see     Service Menu    later in this chapter     Note The service mode should be turned off when finished  as it prevents  remote operation          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Service Mode          Press  to toggle and set the service mode on or off     SCREEN CONTRAST   CURRENTLY  50    SET TO  60      CHANGE VALUE  SAVE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    SERVICE MODE   CURRENTLY  OFF  SET TO  ON    TOGGLE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Diagnostics Menu    3 64  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Date Time  The Date Time screen and allows the user to view and change the system  date and time  24 hour format   The internal clock is powered by its own  battery when instrument power is off          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Date Time          Use        and  to move and change the value of  the date and time          Press  to edit and save the new date and time     Diagnostics Menu  The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and  functions  This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument  The  analog input readings and analog input voltages are displayed if the I O  expansion board option is installed          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics     DATE AND TIME   19 MAR 2005 12 34 56  DATE AND TIME   PRESS TO EDIT  19 MAR 2005 12 34 56    SETTING  DAYS  SET MONTHS  CHANGE VALUE    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    DIAGNOSTICS    
246. set nox gas value  set high no gas value  set high no2 gas value  set high nox gas value  set low no gas value  set low no2 gas value  set low nox gas value  These commands set the NO  NO2  and NOx span gas concentrations used  by the auto calibration routine to value  where value is a floating point  representation of the gas concentration in current selected units  The gas  units are the same as those chosen by the user  The example below sets the  NO span gas concentration to 123 4 ppm     Send   set no gas 123 4  Receive   set no gas 123 4 ok    no bkg  nox bkg  These commands report the current NO and NOx backgrounds  The  example below reports that the NO background is 55 ppm     Send   no bkg  Receive   no bkg 55 ppm    set no bkg value  set nox bkg value  These commands are used to set NO and NOx backgrounds to user defined  values to value  where value is a floating point representation of the  background in current selected units  The example below sets the NO  background to 55 ppm     Send   set no bkg 55  Receive   set no bkg 55 ok    C Link Protocol Commands  Keys Display    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 27    pres cal  This command reports the pressure recorded at the time of calibration  The  example below shows that the pressure at calibration is 33 8 mmHg     Send   pres cal  Receive   pres cal 33 8 mmHg    set pres cal  This command automatically sets the current pressure as the calibration  pressure  The example below 
247. shown below  All of the  values are reported as 32 bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format  This  uses 2 sequential registers  least significant 16 bits first     The request specifies the starting register address and the number of  registers  Registers are addressed starting at zero  Therefore registers  numbered 1   16 are addressed as 0   15  The register data in the response  message are packed as two bytes per register  with the binary contents right  justified within each byte  For each register  the first byte contains the high  order bits and the second contains the low order bits     Response    Field Name   Hex     Function  0x01    Byte Count  0x03    Outputs status 2 10  0xCD    Outputs status 11 15  0x0A    Request    Function code  1 Byte  0x03 or 0x04    Starting Address  2 Bytes  0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument    Quantity of Registers  2 Bytes  1 to maximum allowed by instrument    MODBUS Protocol  Function Codes    C 6  42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific     N   Quantity of Registers    Here is an example of a request to read registers 10   13     The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B   The contents of registers 11   13 are 0x00 0x00  0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64   respectively     Response    Function code  1 Byte  0x03 or 0x04    Byte count  1 Byte  2 x N     Register value  N  x 2 Bytes  n   N or N 1    Error Response    Function code  1 Byte  Function code   0x80    Exception code  1 By
248. sor Input    2  Ground    3   15V    4   15V    INPUT BD  MJ8  1   15V    2  Ground    3   15V    4   5V    5  Ground    6  Measurement Frequency Output    7  Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage    8  SPI Output    9  SPI Clock    10  SPI Board Select    AMB TEMP  MJ9  1  Ambient Temperature Thermistor    2  Ground    HVPS  MJ10  1  HV Power Supply Voltage Adjust    2  Ground    Table 6 3  Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions  continued    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal Descriptions    Troubleshooting  Connector Pin Descriptions    6 14  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    3  HV Power Supply On Off    4  Ground    5  HV Power Supply Voltage Monitor    6  Ground    7  Ground    FLOW SW  MJ14  1  NC    2  Ground    3  Ozonator Flow OK Switch    FLOW  MJ15  1  Flow Sensor Input    2  Ground    3   15V    4   15V    5  Ground    TEMP CTRL  MJ17  1  Bench Temperature Input    2  Ground    3   15V    4  Converter Heater On Off    5  Converter Temperature Input    6   15V_PWR    OZONATOR  OJ1  1  Ozonator Output A    2  Ozonator Output B    24V IN  P1  1   24V    2  Ground    PROV INPUT  P2  1  Spare Voltage Input    2  Ground    3  Ground    4  Ground    5  Ground    6  Ground    7  Spare Frequency Input    8  Ground    9  Ground    AC PUMP  PJ1  1  AC HOT    Table 6 4  Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions  continued    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal  Description    Troubleshooting  C
249. span gas to calibrate the high  range     Whether dual or single range  the first step in calibrating the instrument is  to assign the calibration pressure  The calibration pressure is used to account  for slight pressure fluctuation brought on by changing weather  The  calibration pressure is set equal to the reactor pressure at the time of  calibration  For more information about calibration  see Chapter 4      Calibration             In the Main Menu  choose Calibration     RESTORE DEFAULT CAL   RESTORE DEFAULT CAL     RESTORE  RESTORE    ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO x  PRESS  TO CONFIRM RESTORE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Calibration Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 23    Calibrate NO and NOx  Background  The Calibrate NO and NOx Background screens are used to adjust the  background  or perform a    zero calibration     Be sure the analyzer samples  zero air until the readings stabilize  The display shows the current NO or  NOx reading     It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating  The longer the  averaging time  the more precise the calibration will be  For the most precise  calibration  use the 300 second averaging time  For more information about  calibration  see Chapter 4     Calibration             In the Main Menu  choose Calibration  gt  Calibrate NO or NOx  Background          Press  to set the new reading to zero     CALIBRATION   CALIBRATION    gt CAL NO BACKGROUND   gt 
250. sponse     Response    Function code  1 Byte  0x01 or 0x02    Byte count  1 Byte  N     Output Status  n Byte  n   N or N 1    Error Response    Function code  1 Byte  Function code   0x80    Exception code  1 Byte  01 Illegal Function  02 Illegal Address     03 Illegal Data  04 Slave Device Failure    Request    Field Name   Hex     Function  0x01    Starting Address Hi  0x00    Starting Address Lo  0x02    Quantity of Outputs Hi  0x00    Quantity of Outputs Lo  0x0D    MODBUS Protocol  Function Codes    Thermo Fisher Scientific  42i High Level Instruction Manual  C 5    The status of outputs 2   10 is shown as the byte value 0xCD  or binary  1100 1101  Output 10 is the MSB of this byte  and output 2 is the LSB  By  convention  bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left  and the  LSB to the right  Thus the outputs in the first byte are    10 through 2     from  left to right  In the last data byte  the status of outputs 15 11 is shown as the  byte value 0x0A  or binary 0000 1010  Output 15 is in the fifth bit position  from the left  and output 11 is the LSB of this byte  The four remaining  high order bits are zero filled      0x03 0x04  Read Holding  Registers   Read Input  Registers    Read holding input registers reads the measurement data from the  instrument  Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same  response  These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous  registers     These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as 
251. st with input  translation  That is  the values read are translated before they are  compared to the selection list options     L   Indicates a button which pops up a selection list without any  translation  The output value is number of the selected option     T   Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with output  translation  The number of the option selected is used as an index into  the translation table to generate an output string     N   Indicates a button which only sends the subsequent command to  the instrument  No user prompting happens     The following string through an optional         or the end of the line is the  command which is to be sent to the instrument upon the completion of the  button selection  The command string should normally contain print style  formatting to include the user input  If a         is present  it indicates a  command which is sent to the instrument upon successful completion of  the button command to update the value field     This is not currently used     C Link Protocol Commands  Record Layout Definition    B 48  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Examples  Some examples    n  is the C syntax for an end of line character       Concentrations n     This is a single text only line       n     This is a single blank line       NO 3s n     This is a line which appears slightly indented  The text field is  NO   the  value is taken from the third element of the data response  and interprete
252. successfully sets the calibration pressure to  35 0 mmHg     Send   set pres cal 35 0  Receive   set pres cal 35 0 ok    set cal pres  This command automatically sets the current pressure as the calibration  pressure  The example below successfully sets the calibration pressure     Send   set cal pres  Receive   set cal pres ok    Keys Display  push button  button     do   down   en   enter   he   help   le   left   me   menu   ri   right    ru   run   up   1   2   3   4      These commands simulates pressing the front panel pushbuttons  The  numbers represent the front panel soft keys  from left to right     Send   push enter  Receive   push enter ok    isc  iscreen  This command retrieves the framebuffer data used for the display on the  iSeries instrument  It is 19200 bytes in size  2 bits per pixel  4 pixels per  byte arranged as 320 by 240 characters  The data is sent in RLE encoded  form to save time in transmission  It is sent as a type  5  binary c_link  response with no checksum     The RLE encoding consists of a 0 followed by an 8 bit count of consecutive  0xFF bytes  The following  c  code will expand the incoming data     C Link Protocol Commands  Keys Display    B 28  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    To convert this data into a BMP for use with windows  it needs to be turned  into a 4BPP as that is the smallest windows can display  Also note that BMP  files are upside down relative to this data  i e  the top display line is the
253. systems and output have been empirically determined  This  empirical data is used to compensate for any changes in temperature  This  compensation can be used for special applications  or when operating the  instrument outside the recommended temperature range  even though the  Model 42i High Level does not require temperature compensation for EPA  equivalency     When temperature compensation is on  the display shows the current  internal instrument temperature  measured by a thermistor on the Interface  board   When temperature compensation is off  the display shows the  factory standard temperature of 30   C          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Temperature  Compensation          Press  to toggle and set the temperature compensation on or off     TABLE POINT 01 USER VAL   CURRENTLY  0 00  SET TO  00000 00    MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 62  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Pressure Compensation  Pressure compensation provides compensation for any changes to the  instrument s output signal due to reaction chamber pressure variations  The  effects of reaction chamber pressure changes on the analyzer s subsystems  and output have been empirically determined  This empirical data is used to  compensate for any change in reaction chamber pressure  This  compensation can be used even though the Model 42i High Level does not  require pressure compensatio
254. t SREC LREC  The Select SREC LREC is used to select short record or long record format  for other operations in this menu          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Select SREC LREC          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to set record format     MODE   CURRENTLY  MANUAL NO  SET TO  NO NOX    CHANGE VALUE  SAVE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    DATALOGGING SETTINGS    gt SELECT SREC LREC SREC  VIEW LOGGED DATA  ERASE LOG  SELECT CONTENT  COMMIT CONTENT  RESET TO DEFAULT CONTENT  CONFIGURE DATA LOGGING    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 32  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    View Logged Data  The View Logged Data screen is used to select the start point to view the  logged data by number of records or date and time          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Datalogging Settings   gt  Select SREC or LREC  gt  View Logged Data          Use  and  to toggle between number of records or date and  time          Press  to accept     Number of Records  The Number of Records screen is used to select the starting point to display  the number of records back to view          Use  and  to increment or decrement the numeric value          Press  to set the starting record and continue to the record display  screen     SELECT LOG TYPE   CURRENTLY  SREC  SET TO  LREC      TOGGLE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    SELECT START POINT BY     
255. t To  field displays Full Scale     5  Check that the meter is displaying the full scale value  If the meter  reading differs by more than one percent  the analog outputs should be  adjusted  Refer to the    Analog Output Adjustment    procedure that  follows     6  Press  to set the output to zero     The Output Set To  field displays Zero     7  Check that the meter is displaying a zero value  If the meter reading  differs by more than one percent  the analog outputs should be  adjusted  Refer to the    Analog Output Adjustment    procedure that  follows     Analog Output  Adjustment  Use the following procedure to adjust the analog voltage outputs if a meter  reading in the    Analog Output Testing    procedure differed by more than  one percent     1  Connect a meter to the channel to be adjusted  Figure 7 15 shows the  analog output pins and Table 7 3 identifies the associated channels     2  From the Main Menu  press  to scroll to Service  gt  press   gt   to scroll to Analog Output Calibration  gt  and press       The Analog Output Cal screen appears    If the Service Mode is not displayed on the Main Menu  use the  following procedure to display it     a   At the Main Menu  press  to scroll to Instrument Controls  gt   press   gt   to scroll to Service Mode  gt  and press       The Service Mode screen appears     Servicing  Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement    7 32  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    b  Press  to toggle the Ser
256. t test    Calibration  Calibration    4 4  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    meter  All volumetric flow rates should be corrected to 25   C and 760  mm Hg     3  Precautions should be taken to remove O2 and other contaminants from  the NO pressure regulator and delivery system prior to the start of  calibration to avoid any conversion of NO to NO2  Failure to do so can  cause significant errors in calibration  This problem can be minimized  by     a   carefully evacuating the regulator after the regulator has been  connected to the cylinder and before opening the cylinder valve     b  thoroughly flushing the regulator and delivery system with NO after  opening the cylinder valve     c   not removing the regulator from the cylinder between calibrations  unless absolutely necessary     4  Connect the analyzer sample bulkhead input to the output of the GPT  system     Dynamic Parameter  Specifications for Gas  Phase Titrator    Use the following definitions for the remainder of this chapter     PR    Dynamic parameter specification to ensure complete reaction of the  available O3  ppm min     NO RC    NO concentration in the reaction chamber  ppm    tR    Residence time of the reactant gases in the reaction chamber  min     NO STD    Concentration of the undiluted NO standard  ppm    FNO    NO flow rate  sccm    FO    O3 generator air flow rate  sccm    VRC    Volume of the reaction chamber  cc    FT    Analyzer demand plus 10 to 50  excess    
257. t the tubing from the pressure transducer and connect a  vacuum pump known to produce a vacuum less than 1 mm Hg     3  From the Main Menu  press  to scroll to Service  gt  press   gt   to scroll to Pressure Calibration  gt  and press       The Pressure Sensor Cal screen appears    WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified  service representatives     If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer   the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component     Servicing  Pressure Transducer Calibration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 35    If the Service Mode is not displayed on the Main Menu  use the  following procedure to display it     a   At the Main Menu  press  to scroll to Instrument Controls  gt   press   gt   to scroll to Service Mode  gt  and press       The Service Mode screen appears     b  Press  to toggle the Service Mode to ON     c   Press   gt   to return to the Main Menu     d  Continue the procedure at Step 3 to access the Pressure Sensor Cal  screen     4  At the Pressure Sensor Cal screen  press  to select Zero     The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen appears     5  Wait at least 10 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize  then press  to save the zero pressure val
258. table  point in the conversion table from 0 00 to 10 50  The default table is a  two point table with point 1  0 00 V   000 0 U and point 2  10 00 V   10 0  U          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Analog Input Config  gt  Select Channel  gt  Select Point  gt  Volts          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to save the new value     TABLE POINT 01 CONFIG    gt VOLTS 0 00  USER VALUE 0 00    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    TABLE POINT 01 VOLTS   CURRENTLY  0 00  SET TO  00 00    MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 61    User Value  The User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the  corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion  table from  9999999 to 99999999  The default table is a two point table  with point 1  0 00 V   000 0 U and point 2  10 00 V   10 0 U          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Analog Input Config  gt  Select Table Point  gt  User Value          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to save the new value     Temperature  Compensation  Temperature compensation provides compensation for any changes to the  instrument s output signal due to internal instrument temperature  variations  The effects of internal instrument temperature changes on the  analyzer s sub
259. te  01 Illegal Function  02 Illegal Address     03 Illegal Data  04 Slave Device Failure    Request    Field Name   Hex     Function  0x03    Starting Address Hi  0x00    Starting Address Lo  0x09    No  of Registers Hi  0x00    No  of Registers Lo  0x04    Response    Field Name   Hex     Function  0x03    Byte Count  0x06    Register value Hi  10   0x02    Register value Lo  10   0x2B    Register value Hi  11   0x00    Register value Lo  11   0x00    Register value Hi  12   0x00    Register value Lo  12   0x64    Register value Hi  13   0x00    Register value Lo  13   0x64    MODBUS Protocol  Function Codes    Thermo Fisher Scientific  42i High Level Instruction Manual  C 7     0x05  Force  Write  Single  Coil  The force  write  single coil function simulates the activation of the digital  inputs in the instrument  which triggers the respective action     This function code is used to set a single action to either ON or OFF  The  request specifies the address of the action to be forced  Actions are addressed  starting at zero  Therefore  action number 1 is addressed as 0  The requested  ON OFF state is specified by a constant in the request data field  A value of  0xFF00 requests the action to be ON  A value of 0x0000 requests it to be  OFF  All other values are illegal and will not affect the output  The normal  response is an echo of the request  returned after the state has been written     Here is an example of a request to write Coil 5 ON     Request    Function code  
260. tes screen defines how long zero air is sampled by  the instrument  The span and purge duration screens look and function the  same way as the zero duration screen  and are used to set how long the span  gas and sample gas are sampled by the instrument  Durations between 0 and  60 minutes are acceptable  Each time a zero span check occurs the zero  check is done first  followed by the span check  To perform just a zero  check  set the span and purge duration screen to 0  off   The same applies  to perform just a span or purge check          In the Main Menu  choose Calibration  gt  Zero Span Check  gt  Zero   Span or Purge Duration Min          Use  and  to increment and decrement the numeric value          Press  to save the duration value     Zero Span Averaging Time  The Zero Span Averaging Time screen allows the user to adjust the  zero span averaging time  The zero span averaging time is used by the  analyzer only when performing an automatic zero or span check  The  analyzer   s averaging time is used for all other functions  The following  averaging times are available  1  2  5  10  20  30  60  90  120  180  240  and  300 seconds          In the Main Menu  choose Calibration  gt  Zero Span Check  gt   Zero Span Avg Sec          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to save the averaging time     ZERO DURATION   CURRENTLY  30 MIN  SET TO  31 MIN      MOVE CURSOR  CHANGE VALUE  SAVE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Calibration Menu    3 28  
261. th low range  coefficients  B 10    low no2 coef  Reports sets low range NO2 coefficient  B 25    low no2 gas  Reports sets low range NO2 span gas concentration  B 25    low nox  Reports NOx concentrations calculated with low range  coefficients  B 10    low nox coef  Reports sets low range NOx coefficient  B 24    low nox gas  Reports sets low range NOx span gas concentration  B 25    low range no  Reports sets current NO low range  B 29    Table B 1  C Link Protocol Commands  continued    Command  Description  Page    C Link Protocol Commands  Commands    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 7    low range no2  Reports sets current NO2 low range  B 29    low range nox  Reports sets current NOx low range  B 29    lr  Outputs long records in the format specified in the command  B 18    lrec  Outputs long records  B 18    lrec format  Reports sets output format for long records  ASCII or binary   B 20    lrec layout  Reports current layout of lrec data  B 20    lrec mem size  Reports maximum number of long records that can be stored  B 21    lrec per  Reports sets long record logging period  B 21    malloc lrec  Reports sets memory allocation for long records  B 21    malloc srec  Reports sets memory allocation for short records  B 21    me  menu   Simulates pressing menu pushbutton  B 27    meas mode  Reports sets which measurement mode is active  B 31    mode  Reports operating mode in local  service  or remote  B 39    no  Reports current NO 
262. the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  Streaming Data Config  gt  Select Item  gt  Other  Measurements          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down     STREAMING DATA INTERVAL   CURRENTLY  10 SEC  SET TO  20 SEC      CHANGE VALUE    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CONCENTRATIONS    gt NONE  NO  NO2  lt     NOx  RANGE  NOX     RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 45         Press  to select a new choice     Analog Inputs  The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the output signal  none  or analog inputs 1 8  that is tied to the selected streaming data item  The  selected item is shown by     lt       after it          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  Streaming Data Config  gt  Select Item  gt  Analog Inputs          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to select a new choice     RS 232 RS 485 Selection  The RS 232 RS 485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the  RS 232 or RS 485 specification for serial communication     Note Disconnect the serial cable before changing RS 232 and RS 485  selection to prevent damage to the connected equipment          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  Communication  Settings  gt  RS 232 RS 485 Selection     OTHER MEASUREMENTS    gt NONE  INT TEMP  CHAMBER TEMP  COOLER TEMP  NO2 CNV TEMP  CHAMBER PR
263. the first     will be read and inserted in the text field of the line     Value String  This is followed by a possible string  enclosed in quotes  This is used to place  a string into the value field     Value Source  The value source  which is the item  or word  number in the DATA ERec  response  appears next  This is followed by an optional bitfield designator   The datum identified by the value source can be printed as a string  s    hexadecimal  x   decimal  d   or floating point  f   or binary  b  number   Typically  bitfield extractions are only done for decimal or hexadecimal  numbers     Floating point numbers can be followed with an optional precision specifier  which will be used as an argument to printf s  f format  e g   a field of  4   would be translated into the printf command of    3f    Alternately  the  special character     can precede the precision specifier  this causes an  indirection on the precision specifier  which now becomes a field number      This is useful when formatting  for example  numbers which have varying  precision depending on the mode of the instrument     Binary numbers can also have an optional precision specifier which is used  to determine how many bits to print  For example  the specifier  b4  will  print the lowest four bits of the parsed number     There are serious restrictions on where an  s  field may appear  currently  sources 1 and 2 must be  s   and no others may be  s      Alarm Information  The value source is followed by
264. the following procedure to unpack and inspect the instrument     1  Remove the instrument from the shipping container and place it on a  table or bench that allows easy access to both the front and rear     2  Remove the cover to expose the internal components     Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or  other external fittings     Installation  Setup Procedure    2 2  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    3  Remove any packing material     4  Check for possible damage during shipment     5  Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached     6  Re install the cover     Setup Procedure  Use the following procedure to setup the instrument     1  Connect the sample line to the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel   Figure 2 1   Ensure that the sample line is not contaminated by dirty   wet  or incompatible materials  All tubing should be constructed of FEP  Teflon    316 stainless steel  borosilicate glass  or similar tubing with an  OD of 1 4 inch and a minimum ID of 1 8 inch  The length of the  tubing should be less than 10 feet     Figure 2 1  Model 42i High Level Rear Panel    Installation  Setup Procedure    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  2 3    Note Gas must be delivered to the instrument at atmospheric pressure  It  may be necessary to use an atmospheric bypass plumbing arrangement as  shown in Figure 2 2 if gas pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure    
265. tific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 59    Decimal Places  The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many digits are  displayed to the right of the decimal  from 0 to 6  with a default of 2          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Analog Input Config  gt  Select Channel  gt  Decimal Places          Use  and  to increment or decrement the value          Press  to save the new value     Number of Table Points  The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many  points are used in the conversion table  The points range from 2 to 10  with  a default of 2          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Analog Input Config  gt  Select Channel  gt  Table Points          Use  and  to move the cursor up and down          Press  to save the new value     DECIMAL PLACES   CURRENTLY  2  SET TO  3      INC DEC    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    NUMBER OF TABLE POINTS   CURRENTLY  2  SET TO  10    INC DEC  SAVE VALUE  RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 60  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Table Point  The Table Point submenu allows the user to set up an individual table point          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Analog Input Config  gt  Select Channel  gt  Point 1 10     Volts  The Volts screen allows the user to set the input voltage for the selected 
266. ting  Connector Pin Descriptions    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  6 21    4   5V    5  Ground    6  Measurement Frequency Output    7  Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage    8  SPI Input    9  SPI Clock    10  SPI Board Select    Table 6 9  Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal  Description    INTERFACE  J1  1  Bench Temperature Input    2  Ground    3   15V    4  Converter Heater On Off    5  Converter Temperature Input    6   15V_PWR    AC INPUT  J2  1  AC HOT    2  AC NEUT    BENCH  J3  1  Bench Heater AC Output    2  Bench Heater AC Return    3  Ground    4  Bench Thermistor    CONVERTER  J4  1  Ground    2  Converter Heater AC Output    3  Converter Heater AC Return    CONV TC  J5  1  Converter Thermocouple TC    2  Converter Thermocouple TC     SS TEMP  J6  1  SS Temperature Range Jumper A    2  SS Temperature Range Jumper B    Table 6 8  Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions  continued    Connector  Label    Reference  Designator    Pin  Signal  Description    Troubleshooting  Service Locations    6 22  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Service Locations  For additional assistance  service is available from exclusive distributors  worldwide  Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support  and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi     1 866 282 0430 Toll Free    1 508 520 0430 International
267. to calibration screens are displayed if the auto calibration option is  installed and function the same way          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  Zero or Span Autocal     NO  NO2  and NOx  Concentration    The NO Concentration screen displays the current NO concentration and  sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits  Acceptable alarm limits  range from 0 to 5 000 ppm and 0 to 7 500 mg m3  The minimum alarm  may be programmed as a floor trigger  alarm is triggered when the  concentration falls below the minimum value  or a ceiling trigger  alarm is  triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value   If the  NO concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit  an  alarm is activated  The word    ALARM    appears in the Run screen and in  the Main Menu  The NO2 and NOx Concentration screens function the  same way          In the Main Menu  choose Alarms  gt  NO  NO2 or NOx Concentration     MAX ZERO CHECK OFFSET   CURRENTLY  10 00  SET TO  11 00      CHANGE VALUE    SAVE VALUE    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ZERO AUTO CALIBRATION   ALARM  OK  RESPONSE  5 00    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Alarms Menu    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  3 81    Min and Max NO  NO2  and NOx  Concentration Limits  The Minimum NO Concentration alarm limit screen is used to change the  minimum NO concentration alarm limit  The minimum and maximum  NO  NO2  and NOx concentration alarm limit screens function the same  way          
268. ts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component  For more information  about appropriate safety precautions  see the    Servicing    chapter     Preventive Maintenance  Pump Rebuilding    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  5 5    Pump Rebuilding  Use the following procedure to rebuild the pump  Figure 5 2   To replace  the pump  see    Pump Replacement    in the    Servicing    chapter     Equipment Required     Pump repair kits  two repair kits required per pump     Allen wrench  3 mm and 4 mm    Wrench  9 16 inch    Needlenose pliers    1  Turn instrument off  unplug the pump power cord  and disconnect the  pump plumbing from the instrument     2  Note the orientation of the pump head top plate for later reassembly   Using a 3 mm Allen wrench  remove the eight socket head screws and  washers securing the pump head top plate     3  Discard the old Teflon7 gasket     4  Note the orientation of the diaphragm head for later reassembly   Remove the diaphragm head  Using a 4 mm Allen wrench  remove the  four socket head screws securing the diaphragm head to the pump body     5  Insert the tips of blunt needlenose pliers in the dimples of the clamping  disk  then loosen and remove the clamping disk     6  Remove and discard the old Teflon7 diaphragm     7  Insert the clamping disk into the new Teflon7 diaphragm  three pieces   and screw the clamping disk into the pump  Do not o
269. tting should be replaced  only hand tight     9  Re install the cover     10  Connect the power cord and turn the instrument ON     Cajon Fitting    Capillary    Capillary O Ring    Reaction Chamber Front    Preventive Maintenance  Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning    5 4  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Thermoelectric  Cooler Fins  Inspection and  Cleaning    Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the thermoelectric cooler  fins     1  Turn the instrument off and unplug the power cord     2  Remove the instrument cover     3  Locate the PMT cooler  refer to Figure 7 6 in the    Servicing    chapter     4  Blow off the cooler fins using clean pressurized air  It may be more  convenient to vacuum the cooler fins  In either case  make sure that any  particulate accumulation between the fins has been removed     5  If necessary  use a small brush to remove residual particulate  accumulation     6  Replace the cover     7  Connect the power cord and turn the instrument ON     Fan Filters Inspection  and Cleaning  Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filters     1  Remove the two fan guards from the fans and remove the filters     2  Flush the filters with warm water and let dry  a clean  oil free purge will  help the drying process  or blow the filters clean with compressed air     3  Re install the filters and fan guards     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amoun
270. ttings  gt  Select Relay  gt  Instrument State  gt  Alarms          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to save the new selection for the relay     Non Alarm  The Non Alarm status screen allows the user to select the non alarm status  for the selected relay output  The selected item is shown by     lt       after it   Items displayed are determined by the options installed          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Output Relay Settings  gt  Select Relay  gt  Instrument State  gt  Non Alarm          Use  and  to scroll through a list of choices          Press  to save the new selection for the relay     ALARM STATUS ITEMS    gt NONE  GEN ALARM  lt     NO CONC MAX  NO CONC MIN  NO2 CONC MAX  NO2 CONC MIN  NOx CONC MAX    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    NOx CONC MIN  INT TEMP  CHAMB TEMP  COOLER TEMP  NO2 CV TEMP  PRESSURE  FLOW  OZONE FLOW  MB STATUS  MIB STATUS  I O BD STATUS  CONC ALARM    Operation  Instrument Controls Menu    3 52  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Digital Input Settings  The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list of the 16 digital inputs  available  and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument  parameter for the relay selected     Note The digital inputs must be asserted for at least one second for the  action to be activated          In the Main Menu  choose Instrument Controls  gt  I O Configuration  gt   Digital Input Settings     Logic St
271. uction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific            PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement    on page 7 15            Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal    on page 7 18            NO2 to NO Converter Replacement    on page 7 20            Solenoid Valve Replacement    on page 7 22            Ozonator Assembly Replacement    on page 7 23            Ozonator Transformer Replacement    on page 7 25            Input Board Replacement    on page 7 25            DC Power Supply Replacement    on page 7 28            Analog Output Adjustment    on page 7 31            Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement    on page 7 32            Pressure Transducer Calibration     on page 7 34            Temperature Control Board Replacement    on page 7 36            Fuse Replacement    on page 7 38            Scrubber Replacement    on page 7 38            I O Expansion Board  Optional  Replacement    on page 7 39            Digital Output Board Replacement    on page 7 40            Motherboard Replacement    on page 7 41            Measurement Interface Board Replacement    on page 7 42            Front Panel Board Replacement    on page 7 43            LCD Module Replacement    on page 7 44            Service Locations    on page 7 46    Servicing  Safety Precautions    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 3    Safety Precautions  Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter     WARNING The service procedures in this manua
272. ue     6  Disconnect the pump from the pressure transducer     7  Press  to return to the Pressure Sensor Cal screen     8  At the Pressure Sensor Cal screen  press  to select Span     The Calibrate Pressure Span screen appears     9  Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize  use  and  to enter the known barometric pressure   and press  to save the pressure value     10  Reconnect the instrument tubing to the pressure transducer     11  Install the cover     Servicing  Temperature Control Board Replacement    7 36  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Temperature Control  Board Replacement  Use the following procedure to replace the temperature control board   Figure 7 6      Equipment Required     Temperature control board    Small flat blade screwdriver    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Disconnect all connectors from the temperature control board  Use a  small flat blade screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the  CONV TC cable  Note that the red wire is towards the rear and the  yellow wire is towards the front     3  Snap off the board from the board mounts     4  To install the temperature control board  follow previous steps in  reverse     Ambient Temperature  Calibration  Use the following procedure to calibrate the ambient internal temperature  for the instrument     Equipment Required     Calibrated thermometer or 10K   1  Resistor    Equipment Damage Some interna
273. umber  4 bytes   L   parse a 32 bit unsigned number  4 bytes     There is an optional single digit d which may follow any of the numeric  fields which indicates that after the field has been parsed out  the resulting  value is to be divided by 10 d  Thus the 16 bit field 0xFFC6 would be  interpreted with the format specifier  n3  as the number  0 058     Format Specifier for  Front Panel Layout  The subsequent lines in the ERec Layout response describe the appearance  of the full panel  The full instrument panel as it appears on the screen has  two columns of lines  Each line is composed of three major components   1   a text field   2  a value field  and  3  a button  None of these three  components is required  The text field contains statically displayed text     C Link Protocol Commands  Record Layout Definition    B 46  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    The value field displays values which are parsed out of the response to a  DATA ERec command  It also displays  though background changes  alarm  status  The button  when pressed  triggers input from either a dialog box or  a selection list  There are five kinds of buttons  B  I  L  T  and N     Each line in the layout string corresponds to one line on the display  The  layout string describes each of the three major fields as well as translation  mechanisms and corresponding commands     Text  The first field in the layout string is the text  It is delimited by a      The  string up to 
274. ure  The  pressure is measured by a pressure transducer at the reaction chamber          In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Pressure     Flow  The Flow screen  read only  displays the bypass flow rate  if the bypass flow  option is installed  and ozonator flow rate  The flows are measured by  internal flow sensors  For more information  see Chapter 1     Introduction             In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Flow     TEMPERATURES    gt INTERNAL 28 6 oC  CHAMBER 49 0 oC  COOLER  2 8 oC  NO2 CONVERTER 625 0 oC  NO2 CONV SET 625 0 oC    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    CHAMBER PRES  33 8 mmHg    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    Operation  Diagnostics Menu    3 68  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Analog Input Readings  The Analog Input Readings screen  read only  displays the 8 current  user scaled analog readings  if the I O expansion board option is installed           In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Analog Input Readings     Analog Input Voltages  The Analog Input Voltages screen  read only  displays the 8 raw analog  voltage readings  if the I O expansion board option is installed           In the Main Menu  choose Diagnostics  gt  Analog Input Voltages     FLOW  0 531 LPM    OZONATOR FLOW OK    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ANALOG INPUT READINGS    gt CO 10 2 PPM  SO2 18 2 PPB  CO2 250 PPM  FL1 20 42 LPM  WND 9 86 V  FL2 1 865 LPM  IO7 0 0 V    RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM    ANALOG INPUT VOLTAGES    gt ANALOG IN 1 6 24 V  ANALOG IN 2 4 
275. urrent selections in scratch pad into stream list  B 22    copy srec to sp  Sets copies current srec selection into the scratch pad  B 22    copy stream to sp  Sets copies current streaming data selection into the scratch  pad  B 22    custom  Reports sets defined custom range concentration  B 30    date  Reports sets current date  B 33    Table B 1  C Link Protocol Commands  continued    Command  Description  Page    C Link Protocol Commands  Commands    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 5    default params  Sets parameters to default values  B 34    dhcp  Reports sets state of use of DHCP  B 37    diag volt iob  Reports diagnostic voltage level for I O expansion board  B 16    diag volt mb  Reports diagnostic voltage level for motherboard  B 16    diag volt mib  Reports diagnostic voltage level for measurement interface  board  B 16    dig in  Reports status of the digital inputs  B 41    din  Reports sets digital input channel and active state  B 41    do  down   Simulates pressing down pushbutton  B 27    dout  Reports sets digital output channel and active state  B 42    dtoa  Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per channel  B 42    en  enter   Simulates pressing enter pushbutton  B 27    er  Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions in  the format specified in the commands  B 18    erec  Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions in  the format specified in the command  B 18    erec 
276. ve input or  high voltage supply  Unplug power cord  Check  that cables are connected  properly  Check cable  resistance     Analyzer not calibrated  Recalibrate     Defective   15 volt  Check supply voltages   Diagnostics Menu      Calibration drift  Dryer to ozonator depleted  Replace     Line voltage fluctuations  Check to see if line voltage  is within specifications     Defective pump  Rebuild pump     Troubleshooting  Troubleshooting Guides    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  6 3    Unstable NO or NO2 source  Replace     Clogged capillaries  Unplug power cord  Clean or  replace capillary     Clogged sample air filter  Replace filter element     Excessive noise  Defective or low sensitivity PMT  Unplug power cord  Remove  PMT  Install known good  PMT  Plug in power cord   Check performance     Defective input board  Replace board     Defective cooler  Check temperature  less  than     2   C at Tamb   25   C      Non linear response  Incorrect calibration source  Verify accuracy of multipoint  calibration source gas     Leak in sample probe line  Check for variable dilution     Excessive response  time  Partially blocked sample capillary  Unplug power cord  Clean or  replace capillary     Hang up blockage in sample filter  Change element     Improper converter  operation  Questionable calibration gas  Verify accuracy     Converter temperature too high or  too low  Temperature should be  approximately 325   C     Low line voltage  Check to
277. ver tighten     Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small  amounts of static electricity  A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must  be worn while handling any internal component  For more information  about appropriate safety precautions  see the    Servicing    chapter     Preventive Maintenance  Pump Rebuilding    5 6  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Figure 5 2  Rebuilding the Pump    8  Remove the screw and nut securing the flapper valves and remove and  discard old flapper valves     Preventive Maintenance  Pump Rebuilding    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  5 7    9  Install the new flapper  check that the screw head and not the washer is  on the smooth side of the pump  and check that the flappers are  completely flat and straight     10  Align the diaphragm head correctly as noted in Step 2  and secure with  the four socket head screws     11  Place the new Teflon7 gasket over the pump head so that the eight  screws holes are aligned     12  Replace the top plate and secure with the eight screws and washers  being sure that the Teflon7 gasket stays in place     13  Reconnect the plumbing to the instrument and plug in the pump  power cord     Preventive Maintenance  Pump Rebuilding    5 8  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  6 1    Chapter 6 Troubleshooting    This instru
278. vice Mode to ON     c   Press   gt   to return to the Main Menu     d  Continue the procedure at Step 2     3  At the Analog Output Cal screen  press  to scroll to the channel   Voltage Channel 1 6  corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin  where the meter is connected  then press       The Analog Output Cal  screen appears     4  With the cursor at Calibrate Zero  press       The Analog Output Cal  line displays Zero    5  Use  until the meter reads 0V  then press  to save the  value     6  Press  to return to the Analog Output Cal  screen     The Analog Output Cal  screen appears     7  Press  to select Calibrate Full Scale     The Analog Output Cal  Span screen appears     8  Use  until the meter reads the value shown in the Set  Output To  line  then press  to save the value     Pressure Transducer  Assembly  Replacement    Use the following procedure to replace the pressure transducer assembly   Figure 7 16      Equipment Required     Pressure transducer assembly    Servicing  Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 33    Philips screwdriver    1  Turn instrument OFF  unplug the power cord  and remove the cover     2  Disconnect plumbing from the pressure transducer assembly  Note the  plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection     3  Disconnect the pressure transducer cable     Figure 7 16  Replacing the Pressure Transducer    4  Remove the two pressure transducer assembly retaining screws
279. vicing    chapter before  performing any actions listed in this chapter     Troubleshooting  Troubleshooting Guides    6 2  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Troubleshooting  Guides  The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help  isolate and identify instrument problems     Table 6 1 provides general troubleshooting information and indicates the  checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument problem     Table 6 2 lists all the alarm messages you may see on the graphics display  and provides recommendations about how to resolve the alarm condition     Table 6 1  Troubleshooting   General Guide    Malfunction  Possible Cause  Action    Does not start up  No power  Check that the instrument is  plugged into the proper  source  115 or 220 VAC  50  or 60Hz      Check instrument fuses     Power supply  Check voltages using a  digital voltmeter     Digital electronics  Unplug power cord  Check  that all boards are seated  properly     Unplug power cord  Remove  one board  Install known  good board  Repeat until  faulty board is detected     No output signal  or  very low output   No sample gas reaching the  analyzer  Check input sample flow     Blocked sample capillary  Unplug power cord  Clean or  replace capillary     No ozone reaching the reaction  chamber  Check the Instrument Control  menu to see if the ozonator  is ON  If it is ON  check dry  air supply     No output signal  Disconnected or defecti
280. wer failure      lt ASCII 170 gt   T  I  M  E   lt CR gt     C Link Protocol Commands  Commands    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  B 3    Table B 1 lists the 42i High Level C Link protocol commands  The  interface will respond to the command strings outlined below     Table B 1  C Link Protocol Commands    Command  Description  Page    addr dns  Reports sets domain name server address  B 36    addr gw  Reports sets default gateway address  B 36    addr ip  Reports sets IP address  B 36    addr nm  Reports sets netmask address  B 37    alarm chamber  temp max  Reports sets chamber temperature alarm maximum value  B 12    alarm chamber  temp min  Reports sets chamber temperature alarm minimum value  B 12    alarm conc no max  Reports sets current NO concentration alarm maximum value  B 13    alarm conc no min  Reports sets current NO concentration alarm minimum value  B 13    alarm conc no2 min  Reports sets current NO2 concentration alarm maximum value  B 13    alarm conc no2 max  Reports sets current NO2 concentration alarm minimum value  B 13    alarm conc nox max  Reports sets current NOx concentration alarm minimum value  B 13    alarm conc nox min  Reports sets current NOx concentration alarm maximum value  B 13    alarm converter  temp max  Reports sets NO2 converter temperature alarm maximum value  B 13    alarm converter  temp min  Reports sets NO2 converter temperature alarm minimum value  B 14    alarm cooler temp  max  Reports sets
281. x Screws  2     Assembly Bracket Screws  2     Input Board Screws  4     Input Box    Input Board    Servicing  Input Board Calibration    Thermo Fisher Scientific  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  7 27    7  Re install the measurement bench  Refer to    Removing the  Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel    in this chapter     8  Perform an input board calibration  See the    Input Board Calibration     procedure that follows     Input Board  Calibration  After replacing the input board  use the following procedure to calibrate the  input board     1  From the Main Menu  press  to scroll to Service  gt  press   gt   to scroll to Input Board Calibration  gt  and press       The Input Board Calibration screen appears     If the Service Mode is not displayed on the Main Menu  use the  following procedure to display it     a   At the Main Menu  press  to scroll to Instrument Controls  gt   press   gt   to scroll to Service Mode  gt  and press       The Service Mode screen appears     b  Press  to toggle the Service Mode to ON     c   Press   gt   to return to the Main Menu     d  Continue the procedure at the beginning of Step 1 to access the Set  PMT Voltage screen     2  At the Input Board Calibration screen  press  to select Manual  Input Cal  and press  to calibrate     The screen displays the frequency at GAIN 1     3  Make a note of the FREQ value displayed at GAIN 1  then press  or  to change the GAIN to 100     WARNING The service procedures in this 
282. xamples of the alarm  commands             Diagnostics    on page B 16 describes and gives examples of the  diagnostic commands             Datalogging    on page B 17 describes and gives examples of the  datalogging commands             Calibration    on page B 24 describes and gives examples of the  calibration commands             Keys Display    on page B 27 describes and gives examples of the keys  and display commands             Measurement Configuration    on page B 29 describes and gives  examples of the measurement configuration commands             Hardware Configuration    on page B 32 describes and gives examples  of the hardware commands             Communications Configuration    on page B 36 describes and gives  examples of the communication commands     C Link Protocol Commands  Instrument Identification Number    B 2  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific            I O Configuration    on page B 40 describes and gives examples of the  I O commands             Record Layout Definition    on page B 44 describes and gives examples  of the record layouts     Instrument  Identification Number  Each command sent to the analyzer must begin with the American Standard  Code for Information Interchange  ASCII  symbol or byte value equivalent  of the instrument s identification number plus 128  For example  if the  instrument ID is set to 25  then each command must begin with the ACSII  character code 153 decimal  The analyzer ignores any c
283. y  Stainless Steel 110VAC     9467  Stainless Steel Converter Cartridge    9456  Pump 120VAC  60Hz    8079  Pump 110VAC  50Hz    9457  Pump 220VAC  50Hz    8500  Pump 220VAC  60Hz    8080  Pump 100VAC  50 60Hz    9464  Pump Repair Kit    101055 00  AC Receptacle Assembly  include in this parts list     101681 00  Power Supply Assembly  24VDC  w Base Plate and Screws    100907 00  Fan  24VDC    101905 00  Fuse  250VAC  4 0 Amp  SlowBlow  for 100VAC and 110VAC models     101904 00  Fuse  250VAC  2 0 Amp  SlowBlow  for 220 240VAC models     101399 00  Transformer  220 240VAC  Optional     101863 00  Transformer  100VAC  Optional     4121  Capillary  ozone  0 01 inch ID    4113  Capillary  sample  0 005 inch ID    4119  Capillary  sample  0 008 inch ID  red     4126  Capillary  bypass flow option  0 020 inch ID  purple     4800  O ring  Capillary  pk 10     8630  Filter Guard Assembly  w foam     4338  Optical Filter Kit    6556  Optical Filter Assembly    101562 00  Terminal Block and Cable Kit  DB25     101556 00  Terminal Block and Cable Kit  DB37     Table 7 1  Model 42i High Level Replacement Parts  continued    Part Number  Description    Servicing  Cable List    7 6  Model 42i High Level Instruction Manual  Thermo Fisher Scientific    Cable List  Table 7 2 describes the Model 42i High Level spare cables  See the     Troubleshooting    chapter for associated connection diagrams and board  connector pin descriptions     Table 7 2  Model 42i High Level Cables    Part Number  
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
PDFファイル  OMRON User Manual Template    Matrices de almacenamiento Dell PowerVault MD3460 Manual del  SECURITE INCENDIE  Ficha técnica porce  NEC UX5000 User's Manual  製品安全データシート  Productos Kelmer  F57 Product Manual - Clean Air Systems Inc.    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file